Manual Gl317x Rph2

Content

Instruction Manual

SF6 circuit- breaker GL317X With spring operating mechanisms FK3- 5

This equipment contains Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas (SF6) covered by the Kyoto Protocol, which has a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of 22200. SF6 should be recovered and not released into the atmosphere. For further information on the use and handling of SF6, please refer to IEC 62271: High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 303: Use and Handling of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6).

Administrator AHT 10- 2013

First issue 23- 10- 2013

Compiled by J. Bossu

Approved by V. Texier

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 1/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

10- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 2/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual

Safety Product safety sheets

Annexes

Technical data Technical characteristics

Rating plate

Description and operation General description of the circuit- breaker

L12- 0012EN/01

Description of the interrupting chambers

L12- 105EN/03

Pole operation (interrupting principle)

L13- 005EN/03

Operating device of circuit- breaker

L14- 006EN/03

SF6 gas monitoring

L20- 001EN/07

Packaging - Shipping and storage Packaging - Identification - Storage

10- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L22- 051EN/01

D1821EN/01 3/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual

Installation Erection general instructions

L30- 002EN/02

Tightening torques

L31- 001EN/02

Erection general procedures

L31- 003EN/02

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts

L31- 064EN/04

The installation procedure (advised), developed below, imposes a lifting equipment with the following characteristics : NOTE : If it is impossible to obtain the advocated lifting equipment, one “complementary installation procedure” is supplied in annexes.

3,000 daN) (minimum) H+2m H

H+1m L31- 137EN/03

Supporting frame assembly

L31- 7137EN/01

Coupling of column and chambers Tipping down the pole of the circuit- breaker and vacuum operation

L31- 721EN/03

Installation of terminals with preparation of contact surfaces

L31- 733EN/03

Installation of capacitors

L31- 748EN/01

Installation of stress- shields on the interrupting chambers

L31- 7509EN/01

Lifting and positioning the pole

L31- 7606EN/03

Installation of operating device

L31- 7902EN/01

Continued on next page.

10- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 4/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual

Installation, continued

10- 2013

Connection the vacuum pump

L31- 853EN/03

Installing the synchronous device RPH2

L31- 871EN/02

RPH2 - Correspondence between C.B. poles and the network phases and the phase measuring the reference voltage

L31- 872EN/02

Vacuum operation

L31- 881EN/03

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure for using the pressure gauge (tool)

L31- 924EN/02

Pre- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

L31- 951EN/05

Filling with SF6 gas

L32- 007EN/05

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 5/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual

Commissioning L34- 011EN/06

Pre- commissioning inspections Commissioning test report

RES 310 M EN/10

Commissioning check list RPH2 maintenance

RES 310 M RPH2 EN

Acceptance criteria

CAEN 103 271/3/010

Maintenance

10- 2013

Maintenance plan

L51- 004EN/05

Electrical wear limits

L51- 053EN/03

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

L51- 108EN/05

Intervention on the operating device

L51- 304EN/04

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 6/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual Annexes Tooling and accessories

L60- 028EN/02

Product safety sheets RPH2 - Outline drawing RPH2 - Wiring diagram (2SA0)

PS0000/EN 58.001.115- 01 58.010.111- 16EN

RPH2 - Service manual

58.020.034 EN

Check- list Commissioning maintenance RPH2

58.020.035- EN

End of equipment service life

10- 2013

Dismantling and recovery of components from a circuit breaker

L80- 000EN/02

Managing of SF6 gas

L80- 001EN/02

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas and its secondary products

L81- 001EN/02

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 7/8 GRID

Content

Instruction Manual

Complementary installation procedure 3,000 daN) (minimum)

The complementary installation procedure, developed below, imposes a lifting equipment with the following characteristics :

H+2m

+

H

Supporting frame assembly

L31- 138EN/03

Lifting and positioning the pole

L31- 200EN/06

Installation of terminals with preparation of contact surfaces

L31- 504EN/03

Installation of capacitors

L31- 605EN/02

Installation of stress- shields on the interrupting chambers

L31- 664EN/02

Coupling of column and chambers

L31- 7138EN/01

Installation of operating device

L31- 7902EN/01

Installation, continued

10- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

D1821EN/01 8/8 GRID

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Circuit-- breaker GL317X with spring operating mechanism FK3-- 5 Description

The circuit--breaker is made up of three poles, each activated by a spring operating mechanism.

Diagram

A

C

B

D

Parts table

The table below gives the main parts of the circuit--breaker : Mark A B C D

11--2012

Component Pole of the circuit--breaker Bearing structure Operating device Marshalling cubicle

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4 5

L12--0012EN/01 1/6 GRID

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Pole of the circuit-- breaker Description

Diagram

The pole of the circuit--breaker is made up with three main components : S The interrupting chambers (1). S The support column (2). S The housing of the mechanism (3). 1

4

1

6 7

4 2

5

7

13

3

3 8

Interrupting chambers

The pole is comprised of two interrupting chambers (1) -- in a ceramic envelope -- equipped at each end with a HV terminal (5). The interrupting chambers are laid out horizontally and attached, at their base, to a common housing (6). This housing contains the mechanism used to transfer the operating movement to the mobile contacts of both chambers. The interrupting can also be equipped with capacitors (7) and a corona ring (4).

Support column

Consisting of two, three or four ceramic insulators, the support column allows the circuit--breaker to be ground--insulated and it also encloses the operating tie--rod which is attached to the interrupting chamber’s moving contacts. The support column can also be equipped with a corona ring (13).

Housing of the mechanism

A housing (3) -- situated at the base of the column -- contains the lever and crank assembly and which operates the moving contact. The SF6 filling and monitoring device (8) is also situated on the housing.

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--0012EN/01 2/6 GRID

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Bearing structure Description

The support--frame (10) -- made up with four supports fastened to the housing (3) -- supports all the circuit--breaker components. The support--frame may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customers.

Diagram 3

10

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--0012EN/01 3/6 GRID

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Operating device Description

Diagram

The operating device (11) is a spring operating mechanism of the FK3--5 type. The door of the operating device (11) is equipped with two windows. These windows permit to display the optical signalization of the circuit--breaker state and closing spring state.

3

11

Fastening

11--2012

The operating device is fastened on the housing (3).

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--0012EN/01 4/6 GRID

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

Marshalling cubicle Description

The marshalling cubicle (D) is fastened on the ground near the central pole. Included with : S The relays required to operate the circuit--breaker. S The interconnection terminals boards. S The terminals boards.

Diagram

D

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--0012EN/01 5/6 GRID

Description and operation

General description of the circuit-- breaker

This page is intentionally blank.

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--0012EN/01 6/6 GRID

Description and operation

Description of the interrupting chambers

Presentation Diagram B A

Parts table

The table below gives the main parts of the interrupting chambers : Mark A B

01--2011

Component Interrupting chamber Upper housing

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3

L12--105EN/03 1/4 GRID

Description and operation

Description of the interrupting chambers

Interrupting chamber Quenching medium

The quenching medium is pressurized SF6 gas or -- in particular instances -pressurized SF6+CF4 gas mixture.

Interrupting principle

The interrupting chamber is of thermal blasting type, using the energy from the arc, with an auxiliary autopneumatic effect.

Diagram

1

Description

4

The interrupting chamber has been designed in such a way as to increase the mechanical resistance of the working part and take advantage of the low wear rate of the contacts subjected to the arc in SF6. The working part is enclosed in a leak tight ceramic envelope, providing insulation between the circuit--breaker input and output. The chamber is made up of the following elements : Mark (1) (2) (4)

01--2011

2

Component Envelope Fixed contact Moving contact

Information Can have a long creepage distance, depending on the pollution level. It is worked by the operating mechanism and contains the blasting device.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--105EN/03 2/4 GRID

Description and operation

Description of the interrupting chambers

Upper housing Description

The upper housing encloses the movement transfer mechanism (15) from the operating tie--rod (8) to the moving contact (4) of the two chambers.

Diagram

4

4

15

8

Parts table

01--2011

The table below gives the housing internal and peripheral components : Mark (4)

Component Moving contact

(8)

Operating tie--rod

(15)

Mechanism

Function It is worked by the operating mechanism and contains the blasting device. Transmits the movement to the moving contact of the two chambers. Transfer of the movement.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--105EN/03 3/4 GRID

Description and operation

Description of the interrupting chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L12--105EN/03 4/4 GRID

Description and operation

Pole operation (Interrupting principle) Presentation Introduction

In “CLOSED” position the current passes through : -- the terminal (1), -- the fixed contact support (2), -- the main contacts (3), -- the moving contact (4), -- the moving contact support (5), -- the common housing (6), and follows the opposite chain on the other chamber and the terminal (1).

1

6

2

3

5 4

1

CIRCUIT--BREAKER “CLOSED” ПРЕКЪСВАЧ "ЗАТВОРЕН"

In this module

1

KAPANIŞ YAYI "DONATILMIŞ" CLOSING SPRING “LOADED”

This module contains the stages of the pole operation : Stage

Page 2 5

Opening Closing

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L13--005EN/03 1/6 GRID

Description and operation

Pole operation (Interrupting principle) Opening Opening

When an electrical or manual opening order is given, the energy accumulated in the opening spring (7) is released. The insulating tie--rod (8), directly activated by the opening spring (7), transmits the movement to the transfer mechanism (9) inside the housing which causes the contacts to separate simultaneously in both chambers.

9 8

7

Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L13--005EN/03 2/6 GRID

Description and operation

Pole operation (Interrupting principle) Opening, continued Operation

The table below gives the stages of opening : Stage Start of opening

Description When the moving contact (4) separates from the main contacts (3), the current is switched onto the arc contacts (10). The compression of the (Vp) volume causes the first rise of pressure.

3 Thermal effect

10

When the contacts (10) separate, the arc appears and its energy causes the pressure to rise in the thermal expansion volume (Vt), closed by the fixed contact rod (11) and the insulating nozzle (12).

11 Interrupting and assistance at opening

Vp

4

12

10

Vt

When the rod (11) comes out of the nozzle (12), the thermal overpressure in the volume (Vt) is released causing an energy blast to occur, just before the current zero passage, ensuring final quenching of the arc. The (Vp) volume pressure decreases to the ambient pressure by means of the valve (13) to allow the end of the opening.

11

12

Vt

Vp

13

Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L13--005EN/03 3/6 GRID

Description and operation

Pole operation (Interrupting principle) Opening, continued Molecular sieve

The arc has been extinguished. The SF6 molecules, separated by the arc, are re--formed instantaneously. Residual gases left over from the interruption operation are adsorbed by the molecular sieve situated at the base of the pole. A few powdery compounds are deposited in the form of dust which is quite harmless for the circuit breaker.

Special case of small currents

For small currents (example : operating no--load lines, transformers or capacitor banks), the thermal energy of the arc is too low to provide enough excess pressure. Consequently, the conventional autopneumatic effect developing in the volume (Vp) is used mainly, to blast the arc.

Vp

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L13--005EN/03 4/6 GRID

Description and operation

Pole operation (Interrupting principle) Closing Description

When an electrical or manual closing order is given, the energy accumulated in the closing spring (15) -- situated inside the operating device -- is released. This energy is transmitted directly to the pole operating shaft (16), to ensure closing. The release of the energy stored up in the closing spring (15) causes displacement of the moving parts -- and so the closing of the interrupting chambers -- and also reloads the opening spring (7).

9

7

15 16

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L13--005EN/03 5/6 GRID

Description and operation

Pole operation (Interrupting principle) This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L13--005EN/03 6/6 GRID

Description and operation

Operating device of circuit-- breaker

Presentation Introduction

The operating device is a spring operating mechanism of type FK3--5. The operating mechanism is usually electrically remote--controlled. During commissioning or when auxiliary voltage is lacking, operations can also be performed directly on the mechanism.

Warning

OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRESSURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULATION pme.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3 5

Description of the mechanism Auxiliary fittings Operating principle

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L14--006EN/03 1/6 GRID

Description and operation

Operating device of circuit-- breaker

Description of the mechanism Drive shaft

D The main shaft (1) is linked up to the the circuit--breaker pole by means of a cylinder (2). D A damper (4) is linked up to the lever (32). D In the “CLOSED” position, the main shaft (1) rests on the opening latch (6) by means of the lever (5). D In the “OPEN” position, the lever with roller (11) rests on the closing cam (10). D The opening spring (3) activates the lever (33) by means of the chain (34). This spring is a pressure helical type. NOTE : The levers (5)--(11)--(32) (33) form one piece only.

Closing shaft

D On the closing shaft (7) are placed : -- The inertia flywheel (8). -- The closing cam (10). -- The cam (26) that engages the limit switch (17) of the motor (12). D The closing spring (9) activates the inertia flywheel (8) by means of the chain (15). This spring is a pressure helical type. The rotation torque -- created on the inertia flywheel (8) by means of the loaded closing spring (9) -- is balanced by closing latch (14) / roller (16). 9

Diagram

15 17

3

34 33

30

2 1

8

32 11

12

11

33

32 5

16

14

10

6

7

31

26

5

4

34 11

01--2011

33

17

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

12

L14--006EN/03 2/6 GRID

Description and operation

Operating device of circuit-- breaker

Auxiliary fittings Reloading the closing The closing spring (9) is loaded by means of the reducing gears (13) and the spring motor (12).

Auxiliary electric fittings

D The auxiliary contacts (30) are activated by a rod and a lever (31), the latter is activated by the main shaft (1). D The limit switch of the motor (17) is activated by the cam (26) The cam (26) is installed on the closing shaft (7). D The closing latch (14) and the opening latch (6) are electrically activated by coils (22) “Closing” and (27) “Opening”.

Auxiliary mechanical fittings

D The operating mechanism can be activated by the manual levers (24) “Closing” and (28) “Opening”. WARNING : Operating the mechanism by the manual levers (24) “Closing” and (28) “Opening” overrides electrical interlocks. Ensure it is electrically safe to operate the equipment when using these levers to defeat electrical interlocks and lockouts. D The indicator (29) gives the “OPEN” or “CLOSED” positions of the circuit--breaker. An operation counter (36) gives the number of realized operations. D The indicator (23) gives the “CHARGED” or “DISCHARGED” states of the closing spring. D If the auxiliary current supply fails, the hand--held crank (21) permits the closing spring to be fully charged.

Diagram

9 30 17 34 1 23

6

29 12

26 14 21

01--2011

27

7

13

31 28

22 24

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L14--006EN/03 3/6 GRID

Description and operation

Operating device of circuit-- breaker

Operating principle Warning

OPERATION AUTHORIZED ONLY IF THE OPERATING DEVICE IS CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST NOT BE OPERATED AT A SF6 PRESSURE GAS LOWER THAN THE MINIMAL PRESSURE FOR THE INSULATION pme.

Closing

D When the closing coil is energized or the manual closing lever is operated, the closing latch (14) releases the inertia flywheel (8). D The closing shaft (7) effects a 180° rotation generated by the loaded closing spring (9). D The cam (10) rotates the main shaft (1) by means of the lever with roller (11). After a 60° rotation, the lever (5) rests on the opening latch (6). D Simultaneously, the opening spring (3) is loaded by means of the chain (34) activated by the rotation of the lever (33). D A freewheel, installed on the gear wheel (19), avoids the reducing gears (13) and the motor (12) being driven by the gear wheel of the inertia flywheel (8). NOTE : A mechanical device (not shown) prevents all closing operations if the circuit--breaker is already in the “CLOSED” position.

Diagram 9 34

3

33

1 6

8 5 12

10

22 13

19

14

27

11

7

28

24

Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L14--006EN/03 4/6 GRID

Description and operation

Operating device of circuit-- breaker

Operating principle, continued Reloading the closing D When the motor (12) is supplied with current, it immediately starts to load spring the closing spring (9) by means of the reducing gears (13) of the inertia flywheel (8) and the chain (15). D At the full stroke, the gear (19) is at the no tooth sector of the inertia flywheel (8) and the reducing gears (13) can decelerate without causing strain on the closing latch (14). NOTE : During the loading of the closing spring, the supplying circuit of the closing coil is cut to avoid an untimely closing operation.

Diagram 9 15

8 8 14 12

13

19

19

Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L14--006EN/03 5/6 GRID

Description and operation

Operating device of circuit-- breaker

Operating principle, continued Opening

D When the opening coil (27) is energized or the manual opening lever (28) is operated, the opening latch (6) releases the lever (5). D The main shaft (1) effects a 60° clockwise rotation -- generated by the loaded opening spring (3) -- before reaching the circuit--breaker “OPEN” position. D A damper (4) dampens the excess energy to smoothly finish travel.

Diagram

3 60°

1 6 4

5

27

28

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L14--006EN/03 6/6 GRID

Description and operation

SF6 gas monitoring

Presentation Introduction

The circuit--breaker uses pressurized SF6 gas as electric arc quenching gas. The SF6 gas pressure monitoring is essential to assure the circuit--breaker performances.

Principle

There is two SF6 gas pressure monitoring types : D Permanent monitoring with the help of a threshold densimeter. D Periodic monitoring with the help of a dial densimeter (visual control)

Symbols

IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics. Symbol pre pae pme

In this module

Designation Filling rated pressure for the insulation Alarm pressure for the insulation Minimal pressure for the insulation

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3 4 5

Gas pressure and density Pressure measurement Measuring density Densimeter

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L20--001EN/07 1/6 GRID

Description and operation

SF6 gas monitoring

Gas pressure and density Introduction

The electrical characteristics of switchgear depend on the density of SF6 gas i.e. the mass of gas pumped into a compartment of a given volume.

Constant temperature

At constant temperature, an increase of gas density results in a higher gas pressure against the walls of compartment.

Constant density

At constant density, with an fixed compartment volume, the pressure changes in the same way as the temperature. Since the gas density remains invariable owing to the fact that no modification occurs in the quantity of gas or the volume of the relevant compartment, the electrical characteristics of the switchgear will remain unchanged.

Conclusion

Since it is difficult to measure the gas density directly, it is essential to know accurately its absolute pressure and temperature.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L20--001EN/07 2/6 GRID

Description and operation

SF6 gas monitoring

Pressure measurement Effective pressure ? Absolute pressure ?

Absolute pressure = effective pressure + atmospheric pressure

Pressure

Effective

Absolute

01--2011

Description Diagram The pressure of SF6 gas is Standard pressure gauge measured by of a standard pressure gauge with a deformable diaphragm actuating an indicating pointer. One surface of the diaphragm is in contact with the SF6 gas, while the other is in contact with the atmosphere. The difference between the gas and the atmosphere is thus measured, taking atmospheric pressure as a reference. This is the SF6 measurement of the effective pressure of the SF6 gas. Atmospheric pressure If the deformable diaphragm, one Absolute surface of which is in contact with pressure gauge the SF6 gas, blocks a volume where a vacuum has been developed, the pressure gauge measures the pressure difference between that of the SF6 gas and the vacuum. Since the latter is zero, the pressure gauge measures the absolute pressure of the gas. The absolute pressure of the SF6 gas, independent of atmospheric pressure, reflects the quantity of SF6 gas introduced into the compartment and hence its Vacuum volume density at the present temperature. This is measured by means of an absolute pressure gauge which is less generally used and more delicate than a effective pressure gauge. This is the reason why a effective pressure gauge is used, provision being made for by corrections required atmospheric pressure variations atmospheric resulting from disturbances and differences of elevation.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L20--001EN/07 3/6 GRID

Description and operation

SF6 gas monitoring

Measuring density Pressure units

D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa). D The practical unit is the bar (14.503 p.s.i.) 1 bar = 1,000 hPa 1 bar = 100 kPa 10 bar = 1 MPa D Standard atmospheric pressure is equal to 101.3 kPa at sea level and an air temperature of 20°C (68°F).

Measuring density

When it is not possible to directly measure density, this may be checked using an industrial pressure gauge capable of measuring the effective pressure. An effective pressure value corresponds to the rated density, determined for normal atmospheric pressure (101.3 kPa) and an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F). For each pressure reading (filling, inspection of densimeter thresholds...), the rated effective pressure should be corrected according to the ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure of the site at the time the reading is taken. See the module “Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure to using the pressure gauge (tool)”. The real pressure is therefore :

Preal = Prated effective in accordance with temperature + ΔPp* * ΔPp : correction in accordance with atmospheric pressure.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L20--001EN/07 4/6 GRID

Description and operation

SF6 gas monitoring

Densimeter Function

D Permanent SF6 gas density monitoring. D Visual SF6 gas real pressure information (MPa -- psi).

Localization

The densimeter is situated onto the bottom of the pole of the circuit--breaker, and joined to the gas volume of the circuit--breaker.

Working

The densimeter is fitted with internal contacts. These contacts close successively if the gas’s density diminishes and determine 2 distinct thresholds. These contacts are wired to the terminal block inside the cubicle and are usually left at the user’s disposal for the following use : D Alarm pressure ”pae” acts as a warning (topping up necessary). D Minimum functional pressure for insulation ”pme” must be used either to lock the circuit--breaker in position or to cause automatic opening. The option is chosen by the client in keeping with operating requirements. All the circuit--breaker’s rated performances are guaranteed up to the minimum specified ambient temperature and the minimum functional pressure for insulation ”pme”. Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L20--001EN/07 5/6 GRID

Description and operation

SF6 gas monitoring

Densimeter, continued Reading the dial

The dial is divided into three colored areas : Green, Yellow and Red. The position of the needle indicates the SF6 gas absolute pressure value.

-1 0

Needle position

Colored area

Direction

GREEN

None

YELLOW

Perform a topping--up operation.

RED

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Abnormally low density, find the origin of the leak and contact ALSTOM Grid After--sales Service.

L20--001EN/07 6/6 GRID

Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage

Presentation Information

The different parts of the poles (chambers and column) are filled with nitrogen (N2) for transport purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20°C (68°F).

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Packaging Identifying sub--assemblies and their packaging Storage

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L22--051EN/01 1/6 GRID

Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage

Packaging Introduction

For transport, the different parts of the apparatus are divided--up between several cases : S Interrupting chambers + (corona rings chambers). S Columns + (corona rings, electrical connections ...). S Operating devices : each operating device is wrapped in a protective bag. S Frames if the latter is supplied by ALSTOM Grid. S The SF6 bottle(s) or -- in particular instances -- SF6 bottle(s) and CF4 bottle(s). S Marshalling cubicle. S Assembly products (grease, oil, etc.) used for installation. S Capacitors (if the apparatus is equipped with these).

Characteristics of packaging cases

The table below gives the characteristics of the circuit--breaker components packaging cases depending on the apparatus :

Packaging case type Interrupting chambers x 3 Interrupting chambers with resistors * x 3 Columns (2 insulators) Columns (3 insulators) Columns (4 insulators) Frame (H = 2503 mm) Frame (H = 3377 mm) Frame (H = 4877 mm) Operating device SF6 gas (SF6+CF4) SF6 gas gas CF4 gas mixture Marshalling cubicle Necessities (products) for assembly Capacitors *

Qty

Length cm

Width cm

Height cm

Gross weight kg

1

513

181

136

1

706

218

133

1

503

188

108

1

532

191

105

1

627

191

105

1

308

96

96

1

396

96

96

1

546

96

96

3

102

85

128

1

131

76

172

284

1

60

60

70

37

1

266

141

124

* * *

* Depending of the apparatus NOTE : the values in the above table are given as an indication so that an appropriate means of lifting can be envisaged.

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L22--051EN/01 2/6 GRID

Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage

Identifying sub--assemblies and their packaging Introduction

Each circuit--breaker sub--assembly (poles, operating mechanism, etc.) is identified by a plate giving its reference numbers. These numbers are marked on the packaging cases of each sub--assembly.

Example of marking and identifying

-- Manufacturer reference No. = 101 525 -- Circuit--breaker identification No. 1 -- Pole No. 2 IDENTIFICATION OF SUB--ASSEMBLIES AND TOOLING

MARKING OF PACKAGING CASES

MANUFACTURER REFERENCE No.

2

1

101 525 0010 0101

101 525 0010 no SÉRIE Rep. 01/2

CASE No.

POLE No.

CIRCUIT--BREAKER IDENTIFICATION No.

Place of the plates

Choose and install the components identified by the plate (1). 101 525 0010 no SÉRIE Rep. 01/2 1 OUTSIDE PLATE

INSIDE PLATE

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L22--051EN/01 3/6 GRID

Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage

Storage Introduction

The storage procedures defined below are for storage times of less than 2 years. For longer periods, special packaging must be designed and appropriate procedures devised.

Short--term storage (6 months)

The apparatus must be stored in its transport packaging and placed on beams in a flood--proof place.

Medium--term storage The table below indicate how to stock the main components of the circuit-(less than 2 years) breaker for a medium--term storage : Component Components of the circuit--breaker pole

Operating device

Storage The apparatus must be stored with its transport packaging open whilst placed on beams in a closed (indoor), but ventilated, flood--proof place. The operating device should be stored in the same place as the circuit--breaker, these two sub--assemblies being inseparable. Check that the packaging is leak--tight. If this has been damaged, proceed as follows : S The operating device should be placed so that air can enter through the vents of the rear plate and side panels. S In order to prevent corrosion damage due to formation of condensation, it is mandatory that the heating circuit be switched on. Continued on next page.

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L22--051EN/01 4/6 GRID

Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage

Storage

Centralizing cubicle

The centralizing cubicle should be stored in the same place as the circuit--breaker and the operating device, these three sub--assemblies being inseparable. S In order to prevent corrosion damage due to formation of condensation, it is mandatory that the heating circuit be switched on. Put vetically the centtralizing cubicle for that air can enter through the vents.

ANY CHANGE OF LOCATION OF THE APPARATUS (EVEN AFTER COMMISSIONING) SHOULD BE DONE AT A REDUCED PRESSURE OF 0.03 MPa.

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L22--051EN/01 5/6 GRID

Packaging -- Shipping and storage

Packaging - Identification - Storage

This page is intentionally blank.

11--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L22--051EN/01 6/6 GRID

Installation

Erection general instructions

Erection general instructions Instructions of environment

The table below gives the instructions of environment to respect for the erection : Instruction

Erection instructions

Comment

A

Verify the Civil engineering work : dimensions, levels of concrete pads (structure fixation), in accordance with the tolerances given by Civil work standards (refer to circuit--breaker outline).

B

Avoid any dust production and masonry work during erection of the circuit--breaker.

The table below gives the instructions to respect for proper erection of the circuit--breaker : Instruction

Comment

1

Read all the “Installation” modules completely before beginning erection works. The erection instructions describe all the procedures to be carried out as well as their chronological order.

2

Handle sub--assemblies in a correct manner, particularly insulators.

3

The shipping case should be open as required during erection procedures. Respect sub--assemblies CAUTION : identification.

4

When shipping covers are removed, proceed to the next assembly sequence in as short as possible time. Store the shipping covers under shelter, for a possible future use.

5

Respect references to i.e. :“Tightening torques”.

other

modules,

Warning

No responsibility is taken over by ALSTOM Grid for damages and disturbances resulting out of non--adherence to the “Installation” modules.

01--2011

L30--002EN/02 1/2

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

GRID

Installation

Erection general instructions

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L30--002EN/02 2/2 GRID

Installation

Tightening torques

Presentation Introduction

In the assembling with screws, all the fastening screws must be “greased” before torque tightening.

Products used

The table below gives the list of the used products for the screws before tightening : Designation

Grease Contact grease Silicon grease Glue

In this module

ALSTOM Grid item reference --01835208 (1kg box) --01835118 (200g tube) --01835265 (100g tube) --01818327 (250 ml)

Supplier

MOBIL OIL EPMF

Supplier item reference MOBILPLEX 47 MOBILUX EP3 CONTACTAL HPG

SAMARO

MOLYKOTE 111

LOCTITE

LOCTITE 225

This module contains the following topics : Topic Screw greasing before tightening Tightening torques values

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3

L31--001EN/02 1/4 GRID

Installation

Tightening torques

Screw greasing before tightening Choice of the product to use

The table below gives the product to use for the screws before tightening depending on the assembling type : If assembling... usual electrical connections

with seals

Where to apply the product ?

Product to use ... MOBILPLEX 47 MOBILUX EP3 CONTACTAL HPG Can be dismantled ? YES NO

Product ... MOLYKOTE 111 LOCTITE 225

The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate product before tightening depending on the assembling type : If assembling...

With screws

With bolts

usual

electrical connections

Tapping or threading

with seals

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Tapping or threading

L31--001EN/02 2/4 GRID

Installation

Tightening torques

Tightening torques values Values table

The tool and the tightening method must be such that the torque actually applied to the screw head corresponds with the reference torque shown in the table below, to within a tolerance of ± 20%.

TIGHTENING TORQUES in daN.m STEEL SCREWS

01--2011

CLASS 6.8 or STAINLESS A2--70, A4--70 STAINLESS A2--80, A4--80

CLASS 8.8

M2,5

0,05

0,06

M3

0,09

0,11

M4

0,19

0,26

M5

0,38

0,51

M6

0,66

0,88

M8

1,58

2,11

M10

3,20

4,27

M12

4,97

6,63

M14

8,67

11,56

M16

13,42

17,90

M20

26,22

34,98

M24

45,68

60,93

M30

90,44

120,65

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--001EN/02 3/4 GRID

Installation

Tightening torques

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--001EN/02 4/4 GRID

Installation

Erection general procedures

Presentation Introduction

During the erection of the circuit--breaker, some particular mounting or checking operations will be realized.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Preparing and installing static seals Screw sealing Using a water pressure gauge

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 5

L31--003EN/02 1/6 GRID

Installation

Erection general procedures

Preparing and installing static seals Necessary products

Process

List of the ALSTOM Grid products necessary for the installing : ALSTOM Diagram Designation Grid reference --01861262

Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835265

MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)

The table below gives the steps of installing static seals : Step 1 2

3

4 5

Action Clean bearing grooves and surfaces using ISOPROPANOL. Rid the seal of all foreign bodies such as paintbrush bristles or filings... Remove (where applicable) the color identification point with fingernail, never with a sharp instrument. Lightly lubricate the seal by hand using MOLYKOTE 111 grease.

Check the condition of the seal which should present no scratches or deformation (it should be neither flattened, stretched, nor broken).

Do not use a brush to do this. Eliminate excess grease by squeezing the seal between fingers, leaving only a thin layer on the entire surface.

Put the seal(s) in place. Lubricate both bearing surfaces Do not put grease on the inside with MOLYKOTE 111. surface. Fill the residual volume of the seal’s outside groove with grease.

Greasing zone

01--2011

Comment

Only seals are greased in this zone

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Greasing zone

L31--003EN/02 2/6 GRID

Installation

Erection general procedures

Screw sealing Introduction

To prevent humidity from penetrating SF6 gaskets, the outer mounting screws should be sealed by applying an appropriate product. NOTE : This procedure should be applied to all assemblages of parts submitted to SF6 pressure and electrical connection assembling.

Necessary products

List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the screw sealing : ALSTOM Grid reference

Choice of the product to use

Diagram

Designation

--01818327

LOCTITE 225 (250ml)

--01835265

MOLYKOTE 111 (100g tube)

--01835118

CONTACTAL HPG (200g tube)

The table below gives the product to use for the screw sealing depending on the assembling type : If assembling...

with seals

electrical connections

Product to use ... Can be dismantled ? YES NO

Product ... MOLYKOTE 111 LOCTITE 225

CONTACTAL HPG Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--003EN/02 3/6 GRID

Installation

Erection general procedures

Screw sealing, continued Where to apply the product ?

The table below indicates the part of the screws to treat with the appropriate product before tightening depending on the assembling type : Assembling with screws

Assembling with bolts

Tapping or threading

Tapping or threading

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--003EN/02 4/6 GRID

Installation

Erection general procedures

Using a water pressure gauge Introduction

In each assemblage performed using a double seal (1) and (2), the volume (3) communicates with the outside by a channel (4), blocked--off by a plug (5) or (6), so that leak--tightness can be checked. 1 3 2 4

6

5

Process

The table below gives the steps of the leak--tightness checking using a water pressure gauge : Step 1

Action Remove the leak test plug (5) or (6) and its seal (7) if necessary, leave open for half an hour.

Diagram 7

5

6

2...3 turns 2

Connect up the water pressure gauge (8), using the adapter (9) or (10).

10 8 9

3

4

Fill the water pressure gauge’s U tube to half way up. NOTE : If temperature is less than 0°C, use an anti--freeze mixture instead of water. D After a few minutes note the water column level R1. D Note the water column level R2 again after half an hour. The displacement H should be less than 10 mm. At the end of the inspection, pull the adapter of the water pressure gauge and replace the leak test plug (5) or (6) and its seal (7), where required. 5

H R2 R1

7 6

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--003EN/02 5/6 GRID

Installation

Erection general procedures

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--003EN/02 6/6 GRID

Installation

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts Presentation Introduction

The pole parts (chambers and columns) are filled with nitrogen (N2) for transport purposes to an effective pressure of 0.03 MPa at 20°C. It is of prime importance that the presence of N2 gas in pole be verified before going any further with installation.

Necessary tools

List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the checking for presence of N2 gas in poles : Mark (3)

In this module

Diagram

Designation

Number

Filling tool

1

This module contains the following topics : Topic Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers

04- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 4

L31- 064EN/04 1/4 GRID

Installation

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns Opening the case of the columns

Remove only the cover of the case. Remove packaging protection , to free the housing (7) of the column. NOTE : Keep the packaging protection

,

for later utilization.

7

Visual inspection of the column

Begin visual inspection to check the condition of ceramic envelopes. Make sure that their enamel has not been chipped or in any way damaged during transportation. Continued on next page.

04- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 064EN/04 2/4 GRID

Installation

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts Checking for presence of N2 gas in columns, continued Process

The table below gives the steps of manual checking for presence of N2 gas in columns : Step 1

Action Remove the plug (1) and install the filling tool (3), tighten the filling tool BY HAND.

Diagram

3

1 2

Unscrew the valve- cap (4) and press on the valve briefly : some gas should escape. If no gas is expelled, contact our Customer Service.

4 3

D Replace the valve- cap (4) and remove the filling tool (3). D Re- install the plug (1), applying a tightening torque of 4 daN.m; leak- tightness is only guaranteed if this condition is respected.

1

3

4

04- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 064EN/04 3/4 GRID

Installation

Checking for presence of nitrogen (N2) in pole parts Checking for presence of N2 gas in interrupting chambers Comment

A transport cover (5) is installed on the housing (6) common to both interruption chambers. This cover is equipped with a test valve, in turn protected by a plug (8).

6

6 5

8

Process

The table below gives the steps of checking for presence of N2 gas in the interrupting chambers : Step 1

Action Remove the plug (8) by undoing the screws (9) and briefly press on the valve clapper (7) : some gas should escape.

Diagram 7 8 9

If no gas is expelled, contact our Customer Service.

2

Re- install the plug (8) using the screws (9).

9 8

x 2 H M6- 20 0,7 daN.m

04- 2013

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 064EN/04 4/4 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Presentation Reminder

Frames may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customer.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Components necessary for the operation Support--frame components (per pole) Preparing the column Frame--support assembly Installing the lifting tools

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 5 6 10

L31--137EN/03 1/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Components necessary for the operation Necessary product

Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).

Necessary tools

List of the tools necessary for the installing : Mark (1)

Handling

06--2011

Diagram

Designation

Number

Lifting strap (3 m)

2

The support--frame assembly operations and lifting the pole should be performed by at least two persons.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 2/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Support--frame components (per pole) Introduction

If the support--frame is supplied by ALSTOM Grid, check the necessary components to the assembling.

Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(2)

Support

2

(3)

Support

2

(5)

Screws H M16-45

1

(7)

Screws H M16-35

16

(9)

Washer NORDLOCK NL16 SS

16

Continued on next page.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 3/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Support--frame components (per pole), continued Necessary components, continued

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling :

Mark

06--2011

Diagram

Designation

Number

(20)

Screws H M16-45

16

(21)

Strengthening piece

2

(24)

Strengthening piece

4

(25)

Strengthening piece

2

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 4/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Preparing the column Dismantling the case of the poles

Remove the side panels of the case. NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B and C.

Preparing the pole

D Sling the “A” column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1). D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood cover laying : -- first, the end of the column, -- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensure the correct installing of the frame supports. X minimum = 260 mm

1 1

4

X

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 5/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Frame--support assembly Process

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 1

Action With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7). -- Install the screw (5) only on this support.

10

x1 2x2 7

3

5 H M16--45

9

H M16--35 2

With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

2

10

2x2 7

9

H M16--35 Continued on next page.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 6/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Frame--support assembly, continued Process, continued

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 3

Action Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support (2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).

2

x4

20

3 21 4

25

H M16--45

With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7). 10

2x2 7

9

2 H M16--35 5

With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7). 10 3

2x2 7

9

H M16--35 Continued on next page. 06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 7/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Frame--support assembly, continued Process, continued

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 6

Action Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support (3) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the frame--support (2). Do not tighten the screws (20). 21 3

2x2

20

25 21 25

2 7

H M16--45

Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support with the use of the screws (20).

x2 20

H M16--45

24

24

x2 20 24 24

H M16--45

Continued on next page.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 8/10 GRID

Installation

Support-- frame assembly

Frame--support assembly, continued Process, continued

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 8

Action Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques. 18 daN.m

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 9/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Installing the lifting tools

Necessary tools

Process

List of the lifting tools to install on the frame : Diagram Designation Mark

Number

(14)

Lifting shackle

4

(15)

Ring bolt

4

(16)

Washer

8

The table below gives the steps of installing the lifting tools on the support-frame : Step 1 2

Action Install the lifting shackle (14) in the holes of the frame. Install the ring bolts (15) on the base of the frame, inserting the thick washers (16).

14

x4

16

15

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--137EN/03 10/10 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Presentation Markings

Before coupling the chambers and column, check that the markings on the breaking chambers correspond with those on the column

Time taken for coupling operation

The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in a time of ≤ 40 min. NOTE: The coupling operations must be carried out by a minimum of two people.

T(max) ≤ 40 min

Lifting means

Provide an adequate means of hoisting: 3,000 daN (minimum) H+2m H H +1 m

Stages of the coupling operation

The chamber- column coupling operation can be broken down into a number of stages: Step A B C

E

Subject Positioning the chamber casing Preparing the breaking chambers Preparing the column’s corona shield Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation Hoisting and preparing the column

F

Final coupling

D

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4 5 7 8

L31- 7137/EN01 1/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Positioning the chamber casing Introduction

To facilitate pole hoisting and to improve working safety it is indispensable that the casings be positioned correctly with respect to the lifting equipment.

Positioning the casing

Using the appropriate lifting equipment, position the chamber casing so that: S The centreline of the chambers is perpendicular to the plane of the lifting equipment, S The distance between the casing and the lifting equipment is greater than the total length of the column fitted to the chassis ”L” + 2 m. NOTE: The cradle on the first chamber will be used in the columnchamber coupling for all three circuit breaker poles

Illustration

L+2m

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 2/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the breaking chambers Removing the chamber casing

Remove the side panels and cover from the case.

Rotating the chambers

Using two flexible slings, swing the chambers through 180° then level the transport covers. NOTE: Turn the breaking chamber casing (2) so that the face with the two ’humps’ is facing the lifting equipment.

2

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 3/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the column’s corona shield Elements required: ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid elements required for assembly (per pole): Mark

Assembly

Illustration

Description

Quantity

(50)

Corona shields

1

(51)

Lugs

4

(52)

Fittings H M10-30

4

Attach the lugs (51) to the corona shield (50) using the fittings (52) without overtightening. 51

50

x 4 52

Positioning

H M10- 30

Temporarily position the corona shield (50) and lugs (51) on the casing (2). 50

51

2

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 4/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation Elements required: ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid items necessary for the operation: Mark (20)

(21)

Illustration

Description

Quantity

Seal

1

Screws H M16- 65 (19 mm) H M16- 75 (30 mm)

8

(22)

Washer M16

16

(23)

Nut

8

(24)

Coupling pin

1

(25)

Circlips

1

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 5/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation (continued) Tools required ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation: Mark

Products required

09- 2011

Illustration

Description

Quantity

(30) (31)

”Short” centring pin ”Long” centring pin

1

(32)

Lever

1

(33)

Protective mask

1

(34)

Trolley stop

1

(35)

Fitting tool for coupling pin

1

(36)

(80 cm) Rigid electrical wiring cable

1

(37)

Circlip clamp (not supplied).

1

S MOLYKOTE M111 Grease: greasing contact surfaces S LOCTITE 225: locking fitting in place S MOBILPLEX 47 - MOBILUX EP3: greasing fittings

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 6/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Hoisting and preparing the column Tools required

List of tools required: Mark

Illustration

(45)

Instructions

Quantity

Hoisting strap (3 m)

4

The following table shows the steps to follow when lifting the column: Step 1

09- 2011

Description

Action Fit the lifting straps (45) to the ends of the chassis feet

2

Lift the column

3

Hold the column suspended to give access to its lower end.

Illustration 45

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

x4

L31- 7137/EN01 7/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling Orientation of column

Rotate the column (1) so that the control mount (3) is the same side as the two ’humps’ on the breaking chamber casing (2).

3 1

2

Assembling the centring pins

Fit parts A, B & C to the centring pins (30) & (31) without locking them in place so that they may be easily removed later on. NOTE: Pin (31) is longer than pin (30).

B

A Depressurizing the chambers

30

C

31

S Remove the cap (5) from the transport cover (4) and operate the valve (6) to re- establish atmospheric pressure within the chambers. REMINDER: transport pressure nitrogen: azote (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 20°C (101.3 kPa). S Refit the cap (5). 5

6 4

Continued on next page. 09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 8/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Removing the chamber transport cover

The table below shows the steps for removing the chamber transport cover:

Step 1

Action Remove the fixings (40) and insert the lever (32) through the bracket rings (7). Pull on the lever (32) to open the cover (4). Hold on two two of the cover bolts (40) for later use.

Illustration

x 8

4 7

40 H M16- 55 32

2

Start timing. (The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed within ≤ 40 min).

3

Pull off the cover (4) to free the stop ring (8) and ’rilsan’ collar (9).

4 9

4

8

Fit the protective cover (33).

33

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 9/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Removing the chamber transport cover

The table below shows the steps for removing the chamber transport cover:

Step 5

6

Action Using wire cutters, cut through the ’Rilsan’ collar (9) holding the connector tube and remove it.

Illustration

9

Using the coupling tool (35), remove the tube (10) and separate the cover (4) from the stop ring (8).

4

10

7

Fit the trolley stop (34) and fix in place using the bolts (40) recovered from the transport cover, hand tightening them.

8

35

34

x 2 40 H M16- 55

8

Prepare the fitting tool (35) by screwing the coupling pin (24) onto its end, hand tightening.

35

24

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 10/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the centring pins

Fit the centring pins (30) & (31) hard against the spherical casing (2), lightly tighten the nuts (41). Fit the screws (42) to the centring pins (30) and (31). 31

30

41

42

42

41

2

Removing the column cover

The table below shows the steps for removing the column cover:

Step 1

Action Remove the fittings (43) and open the cover (11).

Illustration

11

x 8 43 H M16- 55 2

Turn the cover (11) through 90° to remove it.

11

Continued on next page. 09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 11/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the seal

The table below shows the steps for fitting the seal: Step 1

Action Clean the contact surfaces ”A” and ”B” with ISOPROPANOL. Only coat surface ”B” with MOLYKOTE M111 lubricant.

Illustration

A

B 2

Fit a new seal (20) and place it on surface ”A”, referring to ”Preparing and fitting static seals”. See module ’General assembly procedures’.

A

20 3

Temporarily fit a rigid cable (36) to counter the effects of the seal (20) coming apart during the coupling process

20

36

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 12/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the coupling pin

The table below shows the steps for fitting the chamber- column coupling pin: Step 1

Action Slowly lower the column (1), inserting the centring pins (30) & (31) into the holes in the flange. Make sure both pins are correctly aligned.

Illustration

1

31 2

3

Slower lower the column to 30 align the pin with the holes in the cylinder (8) and the rod 8 (12).

12

Insert the fitting tool (35) with the coupling pin (24) on its end.

35

24 4

Slightly loosen the two screws holding the trolley stop (34) in place and remove it.

34

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 13/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the coupling pin

The table below shows the steps for fitting the chamber- column coupling pin: Step 5

Action Fit the coupling pin (24) by manually pulling on the fitting tool (34) until it stops on the cylinder (8).

Illustration

24

35 8 6

Fit the circlips (25), sliding them along the fitting tool (35) using circlips pliers (37). See the second method (7). 25

35 7

Remove the fitting tool (35) from the coupling pin, loosening it by hand. Second method: Fit circlips (25) using circlip pliers (37).

37

25

37 35

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 14/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Connection chambers/column

The table below shows the steps for fitting the chamber- column coupling pin: Step 1

Action Clean the contact surfaces ”A” and ”B” with ISOPROPANOL. Only coat surface ”B” with MOLYKOTE M111 lubricant. Remove the rigid cable (36).

Illustration

B

A

Remove the trolley stop fixing screws (40). 36 2

40

Lower the seal (20) onto the chamber casing. Lower the screws (42) on the centring pins.

42 20 3

Continue to slowly lower the column, removing the first two sections of centring pin (30 & 31) when they are no longer of any use as a guide, in the following order: - First section (C) - Screw (42) - Second section (B) NOTE: The aim of this operation is to prevent the centring pins coming into contact with the porcelain fins on the column.

42

(C) 30 31

(42)

(B)

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 15/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Connection chambers/column

The table below shows the steps for connecting the chambers to the column: Step 4

Action Slowly lower the column onto the breaking chamber casing (2). Position the lugs (51) for the corona shield (50) on the rim of the column then attach using bolts (21), washers (22) and special nuts (23) - See ’Locking Fixings’. See module ’General assembly procedures’. Lock the nuts (23) at the appropriate torque, immobilising the bolt heads (21).

5

Tighten all fixings (52) to their appropriate torque level.

6

End of coupling operation stop the timer and note the time taken.

7

Remove the last section (A) and the nut (41) from the centring pins. Fix the last bolts (21), washers (22) and special nuts (23) referring to ”Locking fixings”. See module ’General assembly procedures’. Lock the nuts (23) at the appropriate torque, immobilising the bolt heads (21).

Illustration

x6

21 51

x 4

22 23

H M10- 30 3,2 daN.m

H M16- 65 (75) 13,5 daN.m

52

50

2

21 22 (A)

22 23

x 2 H M16-65/75 13,5 daN.m

41 Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 16/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Vacuum extraction and filling with gas

09- 2011

Once the coupling operation has been completed, continue with: S The air extraction operation S The gas filling operation

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 17/18 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7137/EN01 18/18 GRID

Installation

Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker and vacuum operation Presentation Introduction

The column--chambers coupling is now finished -- the pole is yet maintained by the lifting equipment. In order to continue the pole installation, it is necessary now to lay it on the ground.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker Vacuum operation Protection of the interrupting chambers

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L31--721EN/03 1/4 GRID

Installation

Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker and vacuum operation Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker Process

The table below gives the steps of tipping down the pole of the circuit--breaker : Step 1

Action Using the lifting device, slowly tip down the pole around the axis of the interrupting chambers until the ground. Pay attention to do not damage the stress--shields ring (11).

2 3 4

Lay the supports of the frame on two wood boards (12). Remove the flexible lifting straps (15). Remove the ring bolts (13) and the thick washers (14).

14

x4

11 13

15 12

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--721EN/03 2/4 GRID

Installation

Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker and vacuum operation Vacuum operation Principle

The procedure of the vacuum operation depends on the duration of chambers/column coupling.

Process

See module : -- “Connection the vacuum pump. -- “Vacuum operation”.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--721EN/03 3/4 GRID

Installation

Tipping down the pole of the circuit-- breaker and vacuum operation Protection of the interrupting chambers Introduction

It is important to protect the insulators of the interrupting chambers during the next operations (installing the terminals, installing the capacitors ...)

Process

To protect the interrupting chambers, use packaging protection , retained from the opening of the column case.

01--2011

L31--721EN/03 4/4

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Presentation Diagram

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Components, products and accessories Preparing the contact surfaces Installing terminals

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L31--733EN/03 1/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Components, products and accessories Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Necessary products and accessories

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Terminal

2

(3)

Screws H M12--45

8

List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the installing : ALSTOM Grid reference

01--2011

Diagram

Designation

--01861262

Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106

Vaseline 204--9

--01835118

Contactal grease

--01831320

Abrasive paper A400

--02212337

Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334

Rag

--02211842

Round brush No.4

--02211831

Brush No.16

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--733EN/03 2/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Preparing the contact surfaces Preparing the contact grease

The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease. CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing the contact surfaces

The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces : Step

Action

Diagram

1

Remove the temporary screws from the terminal pads X1 and X2.

X2 X1

01--2011

2

Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3

Eliminate the dust produced.

4

Coat with GREASE.

5

Wipe with a clean rag, leaving just a thin layer of grease.

6

Rub over the grease with waterproof abrasive paper A400.

CONTACT

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--733EN/03 3/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Installing terminals Process

Assemble immediately the terminals (1) on the interrupting chambers (2) after preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminals using screws (3); use CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws. 2 2 2

x 4 3

Comment

01--2011

H M12--45 5 daN.m

1

D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be : R ≤ 2μΩ D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in the same way.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--733EN/03 4/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Presentation Diagram

Necessary tools

List of the tools necessary : Mark

Diagram

(12)

In this module

Designation

Number

Lifting strap (3 m)

2

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3 4

Components and products Preparing the capacitors Installing the capacitors

02--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--748EN/01 1/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Components and products Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Necessary products

02--2012

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Capacitor

2

(3)

Support

2

(4)

Support (depending on the apparatus)

2

(5)

Screws H M12-30

8

(8)

Screws H M12-45

4

(9)

Screws H M12-25

4

(1)

Spacer

4

or

S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--748EN/01 2/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Preparing the capacitors Installing the supports

S Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5). S Install the support (4) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

1

x 2 5

x 2 5

3

02--2012

4 4

H M12--30 5 daN.m

H M12--30 5 daN.m

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--748EN/01 3/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Installing the capacitors Process

Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) using the screws (8) and (9). NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitor support (4) side.

x 2

x 2

1

9

H M12--25 5 daN.m

1

9

H M12--25 5 daN.m

7

6

x 2

4

8

4

10

10

H M12--45 5 daN.m

02--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--748EN/01 4/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Presentation Diagram

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3

Preparing the stress--shields Installing the stress--shields

02--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7509EN/01 1/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Preparing the stress--shields Necessary ALSTOM Grid components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Stress--shields ring

2

(2)

Bracket

8

(3)

Screws H M10-30

8

Necessary product

MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

Assembling

Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do not tighten.

1

2 3

x 4 H M10--30

02--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7509EN/01 2/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Installing stress-- shields Necessary ALSTOM Grid components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Diagram

(5)

Designation

Number

Screws H M12-30

8

Necessary product

LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)

Process

Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4) using the screws (5). NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with “LOCTITE 262”.

1

4

4 1

1

x 4 5

02--2012

H M12--30 5 daN.m

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7509EN/01 3/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

02--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7509EN/01 4/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positionning the pole

Presentation Necessary tools

List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the lifting and positionning of the pole : Mark

In this module

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

LIFTING STRAP (3 m -- 1000 kg)

4

(2)

LIFTING STRAP (6 m-- 1000 kg)

4

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3 4

Positioning the lifting straps Lifting the pole Positioning the pole

Warning

11--2011

“Procedure limited to pole installation only. For removal, contact ALSTOM.” “Any faults or cracks in the column may render the procedure dangerous.”

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7606EN/03 1/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positionning the pole

Positioning the lifting straps Process

The table below gives the steps of positioning the lifting straps : Step 1

2

3

Action D For poles of circuit--breakers fitted with a column made up with three insulators, four 6 m lifting straps are sufficient. D For columns made up with four insulators, prepare four wholes : one 3 m lifting strap (1) knotted with one 6 m lifting strap (2). Pass the lifting straps like the picture below. -- The lifting straps “a” pass over the housing (7). -- The lifting straps “b” pass under the housing (7). Cross the lifting straps “a” and “b” and place them onto the frame using the four lifting shackles (8).

8

b a 8 a b

7

3

1 2

11--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7606EN/03 2/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positionning the pole

Lifting the pole Process

By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the base of the frame. Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legs of the chassis frame (9) to ensure guidance of the pole at the time of lifting. Lift the pole with precaution.

10

9

11--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7606EN/03 3/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positionning the pole

Positioning the pole Process

The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole : Step 1

Action Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its ground attachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting the orientation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.

2

If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so that the upper plate is level. Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground using nut. Remove the lifting straps. Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.

3 4 5 18 daN.m

6

Tighten the fixings on the two floor seatings in accordance with the module entitled ’Tightening Torques’ and in accordance with the diameters of the anchoring points.

12

11--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7606EN/03 4/4 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Presentation Necessary product

Grease MOBILPLEX 47 or MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing)

Necessary ALSTOM Grid tools

List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the installing :

Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Lifting strap

1

(6)

Lever

1

Lifting equipment

Provide an appropriate lifting equipment (300 daN).

Process

The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device on the pole--support : Step A B C D E

F G

Topic Preparing the operating device Preparing the pole operating shaft Coupling the operating device Fastening the operating device

Page 2 3 6 8 10

Removing the blocking tool Low voltage electrical wiring Permanent heating system

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

11 12

L31--7902EN/01 1/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the operating device Unpacking

Remove packaging protection and check that operating device and pole reference numbers are the right ones.

Optical signalizations Check the position of operating device optical signalization :

Circuit--breaker Open

Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the operation : Mark

Installing the necessary components

Closing spring Released

Diagram

Designation

Number

(11)

Seal

1

(22)

Spacer

4

-- Install the spacers (22) on the screws (9) outside the operating device. -- Install the seal (11) on the operating shaft (13). -- Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the operating shaft (13). 13 11

x4

22

9

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 2/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft Introduction

For transport the pole is fitted with a securing tool (4) and a safety plate (5), temporarily attached to the end of the handle (12) To fit the operating lever, you must: a -- Remove the securing tool (4). b -- Manually open the pole. c --Refit the securing tool (4) (“open” position). d -- Remove the safety plate (5).

5

5 7

4

12

Grease

Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the pole operating shaft. Continued on next page.

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 3/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued “Manual opening” operation

The table below gives the steps of “manual opening” operation : Step 1

Action Remove the securing tool (4) then screw the operating lever (6) onto the flange on the front of the handle sleeve (12).

Diagram

4 12

6 2

With the help of the lever (6), effect a 60° rotation of the sleeve (12).

6

12

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 4/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued “Manual opening” operation, continued

The table below gives the steps of “manual opening” operation : Step 3

Action Put back the blocking tool (4) on the flange of the sleeve (12). NOTE : This tool ensure the angular positioning of pole operating shaft during the coupling with the operating mechanism.

Diagram M10

4

6 4

Remove the lever (6).

4

12 5

Remove the safety plate (5) and the screws from the flange on the front of the handle sleeve (12).

12

8

5

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 5/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Coupling the operating device Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the operation : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(10)

Washer M20

4

(22)

Spacer

1

(26)

Spacer

1

(23)

Eccentric spacer

2

(14)

Nut H M20

4

(24)

Wedge (thickness 1 mm)

1

(25)

Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm)

2

Continued on next page.

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 6/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Coupling the operating device, continued Coupling

The table below gives the steps of the operating device coupling : Step 1

2 3

Action Sling the operating device using a lifting strap (1) like diagram. NOTE : Do not remove the roof (17) of the operating device before slinging. Lift the operating device and make this level. Approximate weight 300 kg. Approach the operating device in assembly position, the jib of the lifting equipment must be under the stress--shields ring (to avoid that the cables touch the stress--shields ring). The final approach must be done with extreme caution.

4 5

Introduce the operating mechanism shaft (13) into the cylinder (12) of the pole operating shaft. As soon as the lower fastening screw (9) “A” emerge from the hole of the operating mechanism support (8), install the spacer (26), washer (10) and the nut (14). NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14). 26 14

9 10 8 12 1 17 8

”A” 13

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 7/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Fastening the operating device Installing the fastening nuts

The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device fastening nuts : Step 1

2

3 4

Action Install the spacer (22), washer (10) and the nut (14) on the lower fastening screw “B”. NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14). Install the eccentric spacers (23), washers (10) and the nuts (14) on the upper fastening screws “C” and “D”. NOTE : Do not tighten the nuts (14). Rotate the eccentric spacers (23) to do the contact with the lower edge of the pole--support oblong holes. Tighten -- temporarily at the indicated tightening torque -- the fastening screws (9).

23 5 daN.m

10 14

23

x 2 ”C”

9 ”D”

”B” 14 10

x1

22

Continued on next page. 06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 8/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Fastening the operating device, continued Wedging and tightening

The table below gives the wedging procedure for the fastening screws depending to the X play :

X 22

Important

20 If the X play is ... X 40 min nitrogen purging (N2)

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3

L31--881EN03 1/6 GRID

Installation

Vacuum operation

Simple vacuum operation Process

The table below gives the steps of the simple vacuum operation : Step 1 2

Action Comment/Diagram Start the vacuum pump to KEEP THE PUMP RUNNING evacuate the pole to a value FOR AT LEAST 1 HOUR AT THIS VALUE. ≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa). Close the tap (1) of the vacuum pump.

Open Closed 3 4

1

Stop the vacuum pump. Disconnect the vacuum pump tube (2).

2

5

Fit the filling tool (4) -- HAND TIGHT.

4 END OF PROCEDURE

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--881EN03 2/6 GRID

Installation

Vacuum operation

Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2) Preparing the nitrogen bottle (N2)

The table below gives the steps of preparing the nitrogen bottle (N2) : Step 1

Action Remove the cover (6) and plug (7) from the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8).

Diagram 7

6 8

N2 2

Fit the pressure reducer (10) on the nitrogen (N2) bottle (8).

8

N2 3

Briefly open the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of the pressure reducer to eliminate any air inside the piping (approx. 20 s at low flow--rate).

Close the bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of the pressure reducer. NOTE : Keep the end of the tube (12) in high position to keep the nitrogen (N2) which it contains and to prevent damp air from entering.

Open

9

N2 4

10

11

9

Closed 12

N2

11

Closed

END OF PROCEDURE Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--881EN03 3/6 GRID

Installation

Vacuum operation

Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2), continued Vacuum operation

The table below gives the steps of the vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2) : Step 1 2

Action Carry out a simple vacuum operation. Remove the valve cap (5) of the filling tool (4).

Comment/Diagram ≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa) during 1 hour.

4

5 3

4

S Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap (9). S Open and close the cock (11) of the pressure reducer to eliminate any air inside the tube (12) (approx. 3 s at low flow--rate). S Close the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap (9).

12

9

Open

N2

11

Closed

Connect the tube (12) to the filling tool (4). 4

12 5

Open the nitrogen (N2) bottle tap (9) and adjust gas output by acting on the cock (11) of the pressure reducer (reduced flow rate). S Close the tap (9) from time to time to check pressure on the gauge (13). S Start filling again until the required pressure about 0.03 MPa is reached. S Close in this order : the tap (9), then the cock (11).

9

Open

13

N2

11

Closed

Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--881EN03 4/6 GRID

Installation

Vacuum operation

Vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2), continued Vacuum operation, continued

The table below gives the continuation of the steps of the vacuum operation with nitrogen purging (N2) : Step 6

Action Disconnect the tube (12) from the filling tool (4).

Comment/Diagram

4

12 7

Remove the filling tool (4) with the valve cap.

4 8

Connect the vacuum pump and open the tap (1) to bring the volume of pole back to ambient pressure (filled with nitrogen at 0.03 MPa). Open Closed

9

01--2011

1

Carry out a new simple ≤ 1 mbar (100 Pa) vacuum operation. during 1 hour. END OF PROCEDURE

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--881EN03 5/6 GRID

Installation

Vacuum operation

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--881EN03 6/6 GRID

Installation

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure for using the pressure gauge (tool) Presentation Introduction

SF6 pressure values, for the filling, must obligatorily be read on the pressure gauge 0--1 MPa (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dial densimeter (MPa -- psi), it is not accurate enough for the filling.

Pressure gauge 0...1 MPa

Pressure units (reminder)

D The international unit pressure is the Pascal (Pa). 1 bar (14.503 psi) = 1,000 hPa 1 bar = 100 kPa 10 bar = 1 MPa

Symbols

IEC symbols for the apparatus technical characteristics. Symbol pre pae pme

In this module

Designation Filling rated pressure for the insulation Alarm pressure for the insulation Minimal pressure for the insulation

This module contains the following topics : Topic Example of the filling pressure calculation Calculation of the filling pressure at site Values of the SF6 gas pressures in accordance with the temperature

04--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L31--924EN/02 1/4 GRID

Installation

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure for using the pressure gauge (tool) SF6 gas

The table below gives the SF6 gas characteristics : Absolute pressure at 20°C(68°F) Filling absolute pressure for the insulapre tion i.e. effective pressure at 20°C(68°F) and 101.3 kPa Filling rated effective pressure + 0.01 pre -- 0 for the insulation Alarm effective pressure for the + 0.02 pae -- 0 insulation Minimal effective pressure for + 0.02 pme -- 0 the insulation SF6 gas density pre pae pme Minimum admissible temperature up to

Example

68,7 kg/m3 57,8 kg/m3 55,5 kg/m3 --20°C

Values 0,9 MPa (130.53 psi) 5°C 93,2 kPa

The table below gives the calculation steps of the pure SF6 filling pressure : Step 1

2 3 4

04--2011

0,9 MPa (130.53 p.s.i.) 0,76 MPa (pme+0,03 MPa) (110.23 p.s.i.) 0,73 MPa (105.88 p.s.i.)

Determination of the circuit--breaker’s filling pressure with SF6 gas. Parameters pre SF6 gas rated filling effective pressure for the insulation Ambient temperature Local atmospheric pressure

SF6 gas filling

1,00 MPa (145.04 p.s.i.)

Action Result In the chart (page 4) “Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature”, 0,832 MPa read the pre value on the t°C = 5 row. Calculate the difference of the at0,0081 MPa mospheric pressure : 0,1013 -- 0,0932 Calculate the rated effective pres0,8401 MPa sure pre : 0,832 + 0,0081 Filling is carried out to the calculated pressure, plus 0,01 MPa, Pure SF6 gas filling pressure 0,8501 MPa that is to say : 0,8401 + 0,01

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--924EN/02 2/4 GRID

Installation

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure for using the pressure gauge (tool) Calculation of the filling pressure at site Measurement

Write down the result measurement into the corresponding box : Measure the atmospheric pressure in MPa. A

,

Measure the ambient temperature in °C. B

Calculation of the pure SF6 gas filling pressure

Transfer the values into the corresponding box and write down the result :

With the help of the table (page 5) “Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature”, determine the value “pre“ in accordance with the ambient temperature (B) " C

pre

, Value of the reference atmospheric pressure in MPa D 0 , 1 0 1 Transfer the value of the local atmospheric pressure (A) " A Calculate the difference of the atmospheric pressure (D -- A) " E Transfer the value (C) " C+

, , ,

Calculate the rated effective pressure (E + C) " F , The filling with SF6 gas is carried out to the calculated pressure, plus 0.01 MPa, + 0 , 0 1 (F + 0.01) " G

04--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

,

L31--924EN/02 3/4 GRID

Installation

Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure for using the pressure gauge (tool) Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures in accordance with the temperature Rated effective pressure 0.9 MPa

04--2011

Values of the SF6 gas effective pressures (MPa) corrected in accordance with temperature for an atmospheric pressure of 101.3 kPa : t_C

pre

pae

pme

t_C

pre

pae

pme

--20

0,718

0,610

--19

0,723

0,614

0,587

11

0,859

0,726

0,698

0,590

12

0,864

0,730

--18

0,727

0,701

0,618

0,594

13

0,868

0,734

0,705

--17 --16

0,732

0,621

0,597

14

0,873

0,738

0,709

0,736

0,625

0,601

15

0,877

0,741

0,712

--15

0,741

0,629

0,605

16

0,882

0,745

0,716

--14

0,745

0,633

0,608

17

0,886

0,749

0,719

--13

0,750

0,636

0,612

18

0,891

0,753

0,723

--12

0,754

0,640

0,615

19

0,895

0,756

0,726

--11

0,759

0,644

0,619

20

0,900

0,760

0,730

--10

0,764

0,648

0,623

21

0,905

0,764

0,734

--9

0,768

0,651

0,626

22

0,909

0,767

0,737

--8

0,773

0,655

0,630

23

0,914

0,771

0,741

--7

0,777

0,659

0,633

24

0,918

0,775

0,744

--6

0,782

0,663

0,637

25

0,923

0,779

0,748

--5

0,786

0,666

0,640

26

0,927

0,782

0,751

--4

0,791

0,670

0,644

27

0,932

0,786

0,755

--3

0,795

0,674

0,648

28

0,936

0,790

0,759

--2

0,800

0,678

0,651

29

0,941

0,794

0,762

--1

0,805

0,681

0,655

30

0,945

0,797

0,766

0

0,809

0,685

0,658

31

0,950

0,801

0,769

1

0,814

0,689

0,662

32

0,955

0,805

0,773

2

0,818

0,693

0,666

33

0,959

0,809

0,777

3

0,823

0,696

0,669

34

0,964

0,812

0,780

4

0,827

0,700

0,673

35

0,968

0,816

0,784

5

0,832

0,704

0,676

36

0,973

0,820

0,787

6

0,836

0,708

0,680

37

0,977

0,824

0,791

7

0,841

0,711

0,683

38

0,982

0,827

0,794

8

0,845

0,715

0,687

39

0,986

0,831

0,798

9

0,850

0,719

0,691

40

0,991

0,835

0,802

10

0,855

0,723

0,694

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--924EN/02 4/4 GRID

Installation

Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Presentation Principle

The pre--filling of the pole with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa must be done after the vacuum operation. NOTE : You are reminded that the gas used to fill the pole must conform to the requirements laid out in IEC 60376.

Necessary equipment List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid equipment and tools for the pre--filling and tools with SF6 gas : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(4)

Filling tool

1

(10)

Pressure reducer

1

(8)

SF6 gas bottle(s)

*

* depending on the aparatus.

In this module

This module contains the following topics: Topic

Page 2 3

Preparing the SF6 gas bottle Pre--filling with SF6 gas

06--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--951EN/05 1/4 GRID

Installation

Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Preparing the SF6 gas bottle Process

The table below gives the steps of preparing the SF6 gas bottle : Step 1

Action Remove the cover (6) and plug (7) from the SF6 gas bottle (8).

Diagram 7

6 8

SF6 2

Fit the pressure reducer (10) on the SF6 gas bottle (8).

8

SF6 3

Briefly open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of the pressure reducer to eliminate any air inside the piping (approx. 20 s at low flow--rate).

Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9) and the cock (11) of the pressure reducer. NOTE : Keep the end of the tube (12) in high position to keep the SF6 gas which it contains and to prevent damp air from entering.

Open

9

SF6 4

10

11

9

Closed 12

SF6

11

Closed

END OF PROCEDURE

06--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--951EN/05 2/4 GRID

Installation

Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa

Pre--filling with SF6 gas Process

The table below gives the steps of the pre--filling with SF6 gas operation : Step 1

Action Remove the valve cap (5) of the filling tool (4).

Comment/Diagram

4

5 2

D Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9). D Open and close the cock (11) of the pressure reducer to eliminate any air inside the tube (12) (approx. 3 s at low flow--rate). D Close the SF6 gas bottle tap (9).

Open

SF6 3

12

9

Closed

11

Connect the tube (12) to the filling tool (4).

4

12 4

06--2012

Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (9) and adjust gas output by acting on the cock (11) of the pressure reducer (reduced flow rate). D Close the tap (9) from time to time to check pressure on the gauge (13). D Start filling again until the required pressure about 0.05 MPa SF6 is reached. D Close in this order : the tap (9), then the cock (11). END OF PROCEDURE

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

9

Open

13

11

Closed

L31--951EN/05 3/4 GRID

Installation

Pre-- filling with SF6 gas at 0.05 MPa This page is intentionally blank.

06--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--951EN/05 4/4 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Presentation Warning

DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE GAS FILLING OPERATION SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A MINIMUM PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m). NOTE : You are reminded that the gas used to fill the pole must conform to the requirements laid out in IEC 60376.

Necessary equipment List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid equipment and tools for the filling with and tools SF6 gas : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

2

Filling tool

1

8

Pressure reducer

1

6

SF6 gas bottle(s)

*

14

Gauge 0...1 MPa

1

* depending on the apparatus.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Filling with SF6 gas Confirm the pressure Checking pressure Checking gas--tightness Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit--breaker

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4 6 7

L32--007EN/05 1/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Filling with SF6 gas Filling pressure calculation

Calculate the SF6 gas filling pressure in accordance with the temperature and the local atmospheric pressure. Filling is carried out to calculated pressure plus 0.01 MPa.

See the module “SF6 gas monitoring” (Calculation of the filling pressure at site).

Ambient temperature

0°C

Process

The table below gives the steps of the filling with SF6 gas operation : 7 11 Open

SF6 Step 1

2 3

01--2012

9

Closed

Action Comment Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (7) Close the tap (7) from time to and adjust gas output by acting on time to check pressure on the the cock (9) of the pressure gauge (11). reducer (reduced flow rate).

Start filling again until the required pressure is reached. Close in this order : the tap (7), then the cock (9).

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 2/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Confirm the pressure Process

The table below gives the confirmation operation steps of the filling pressure with SF6 gas : Step 1

2

Action Disconnect the tube (10) -- of the pressure reducer -- from the filling tool (2). the NOTE : Keep unconnected end of the tube (10) higher than the other end, to stop the SF6 gas which it contains from escaping and to prevent moisture entering.

Comment/Diagram

2 10

S Connect the tube (15) -- of the gauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to the filling tool (2). S When the required pressure is confirmed, remove the gauge (14) and and store it away from humidity.

2

15 14

3

Remove the filling tool (2) and refit the plug (17) (4 daN.m) 17

2

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 3/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Checking pressure Principle

Having allowed the temperature to remain steady for at least 12 hours after filling, it is necessary to check and definitively adjust the pressure to its corrected value -- defined according to both ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure.

Preparation

The table below gives the preparation steps before checking pressure : Step 1

Action S Remove the plug (17) and install the filling tool (2). S Unscrew the valve--cap (3).

Diagram

2

3

17

2

S Connect the tube (15) -- of the gauge 0--1 MPa (14) -- to the filling tool (2). 2

15 14

Continued on next page.

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 4/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Checking pressure, continued Decision table

The table below gives the process depending the pressure measured :

14 16 If the pressure measured is ... correct too high

too low

End of control

Action End of control Adjust the pressure by means of valve (16) on the gauge (14) to reach the required corrected pressure. Top--up with SF6 gas If the pressure Action adjustment is ... ≤ 0.05 MPa End of control > 0.05 MPa Proceed to a new inspection after a stabilization period of 2--3 hours.

The table below gives the end steps of the checking pressure : Step 1

Disconnect 0--1 MPa.

Action the gauge

Diagram (14) 14

2

S Remove the filling tool (2) and re--install the plug (17), applying a tightening torque of 4 daN.m; leak--tightness is only guaranteed if this condition is respected. S Screw the valve--cap (3) on the filling tool (2).

17 2 3

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 5/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Checking gas-- tightness Necessary ALSTOM Grid tools

List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the tightness inspection : Mark 12

Process

Diagram

Designation

Number

Leak detector (optional)

1

Make sure that the plug (17) is perfectly leak--tight using the leak detector (12).

12 17

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 6/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas

Moisture content of SF6 gas in circuit-- breaker Principle

01--2012

This measurement is not required, the equipment being provided with molecular sieves in sufficient quantity to give a dew point of ≤ 0°C (32°F) for an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F), this applies for a unit filled to its nominal pressure for 2 or 3 months.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 7/8 GRID

Installation

Filling with SF6 gas This page is intentionally blank.

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L32--007EN/05 8/8 GRID

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

Presentation Introduction

After installation of the bay, completion of all earth circuit and electrical connections, it is necessary to perform certain pre--commissioning inspections. These inspections should be performed with the apparatus ready to be commissioned (energized), in other words S LV electrical circuits conforming, in voltage and type, with the low--voltage diagrams and rating plate of the apparatus. S SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes at rated SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure. NOTE : Rated pressure, pressure of equipment after SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling. S Flexible connections linking circuit--breaker to busbar installed.

Caution

DURING OPERATIONS REQUIRED AS PART OF INSPECTION PROGRAMME PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING, ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNEL WORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT.

In this module

This module contains the following checking inspections : Inspections Pole/operating device coupling sleeve Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas Operating device Finish and test operations

Important reminder

Page 2 3 4 5 6

May we remind you that the Test Report prior to Commissioning RES * * * M * Enclosed with this notice absolutely must be completed. It must be filled in, dated, signed and sent back within two weeks following the tests to ALSTOM Grid Service Contrats 130 rue Léom BLUM 69611 Villeurbanne FRANCE Failing a return of the report within the allowed deadline, the warranty for the switchgear cannot be taken into account and the customer’s liability may be pursued. * There may be several RES

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L34--011EN/06 1/6 GRID

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

Pole/operating device coupling sleeve Checking

01--2012

Check that the blocking tool is not on the flange of the sleeve. Otherwise remove it imperatively.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L34--011EN/06 2/6 GRID

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

Orientation and identification of interrupting chambers Inspection

Check that the interruption chambers are disposed correctly, the bosses (B1) and (B2) must be situated on the same side as the operating mechanism (3).

Rule

When facing bosses (B1) and (B2) : -- chamber ”1” is on the left, -- chamber ”2” is on the right.

Diagram B1

B2

3

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L34--011EN/06 3/6 GRID

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas Reminder

SF6 or SF6+CF4 envelopes are at rated pressure following the SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling operation. NOTE : You are reminded that the gas used to fill the pole must conform to the requirements laid out in IEC 60376.

Parameters

Take note of parameters below : S site altitude, in meters, S atmospheric pressure of site in kPa, S site temperature in °C.

Checking SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas

SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure values must obligatorily be read on the pressure inspection gauge (tooling). Pay no attention to indications given by the dial densimeter on the filling control block (where applicable) ; it is not accurate enough for this inspection. See the module “Calculation of the SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling pressure to using the pressure gauge (tool)”. The table below gives the steps of checking :

Step 1

2

Action Measure SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas pressure by means of the pressure inspection gauge (tooling) Correct pressure found.

Comment Follow the instructions given in module ”Filling with SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas”. Follow the instructions given in module ”Calculation of the SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas filling pressure to using the pressure gauge (tool)”.

SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas humidity level

The SF6 or SF6+CF4 humidity level need not be known as the equipment is fitted with molecular sieves in sufficient numbers to give a dew point lower than, or equal to, 0°C at an ambient temperature of 20°C, for an apparatus filled to its rated pressure for 2 or 3 months.

Checking tightness of assemblages under SF6 or SF6+CF4 pressure

Each on site assemblage of parts subjected to SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas requires seals. The quality of these assemblages must be checked. This inspection should be undertaken once all the filling and pressure control operations are finished. Execute this checking according to instructions given in module ”SF6 or SF6+CF4 gas monitoring”.

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L34--011EN/06 4/6 GRID

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

Operating device Measurements

Note the supply voltage of motors on the operating mechanism terminals.

Inspection

Check that the following items are working correctly : -- heating, -- lighting (where applicable), -- connections on terminals (no excessive tightening).

01--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L34--011EN/06 5/6 GRID

Commissioning

Pre--commissioning inspections

Finish and test operations Finish

Check the general appearance of the apparatus and touch up paint if necessary before commissioning.

Test operations

S The connection of auxiliary circuits is sufficiently advanced to allow remote controls to be used. S Perform 5 CLOSING -- OPENING cycles electrically, by remote control.

Caution

DUE TO RISK OF DAMAGE TO CERAMIC ENVELOPES DURING TRANSPORTATION, PEOPLE PRESENT AT THE TEST OPERATIONS SHOULD SHELTER THEMSELVES OR STAY AT A MINIMUM PROTECTION DISTANCE (ABOUT 50 m).

01--2012

L34--011EN/06 6/6

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

GRID

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT

Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Formulaire RES 310 M

Page / Página : 1/12

DISJONCTEUR À HEXAFLUORURE DE SOUFRE TYPE SULFUR HEXAFLUORIDE CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE INTERRUPTOR DE HEXAFLUORURO DE AZUFRE TIPO avec commande(s) mécanique(s) with __ mechanical control mechanism(s) con organo(s) de maniobra mecànico

_______________ type type tipo

CLIENT / CUSTOMER / CLIENTE

____________________

Poste/Substation/Subestación

_________________________

Référence client /Customer’s reference/ Referencia del cliente Commande ALSTOM N° ALSTOM order N° _______________ N° de pedido ALSTOM Norme Standard Norma

__________

____________________ Repère Item Ref

__________

Spécification du client Customer’s specification _______________ Especificación del cliente

__________

CARACTÉRISTIQUES/CHARACTERISTICS/CARACTERISTICAS Tension/Voltage/ Tensión

_____ kV

Fréquence / Frequency / Frecuencia ____ Hz

Courant en service continu /Normal current/ Corriente en servicio continuo

______

A

Pouvoir de coupure en court-circuit/Short-circuit breaking current/ Poder de corte en corto circuito

______

kA

Pression absolue du gaz SF6 à 20°C : Pression relative du gaz SF6 à Absolute SF6 gas pressure at 20°C : _____ Mpa Relative SF6 gas pressure at 20°C and 1013 hPa :___ Mpa Presión absoluta del gas SF6 à 20°C Presión relativa del gas SF6 à Tension d’alimentation des circuits auxiliaires/Supply voltage of auxiliary circuits/ Tensión de alimentación de los circuitos auxiliares Bobines Coils Bobinas

Moteur Motor ____ Motor

____ V(____)

V(____)

Chauffage Heater ____ Calefación

Signalisation Alarm ____ V(____) Señalización

Circuit de commande Control circuit Circuito de mando

Cablage alimentations / Supply voltage wiring

Définitif/ definitive Temporaire/ Temporary

____

V(____)

V(____)

Le matériel a subi les contrôles et essais avant mise en service, conformément au fascicule (contrôles avant mise en service). The material was subjected to the inspections and tests prior to commissioning as required in sections (inspections commissioning). El material fue sometido a las inspecciones y a los ensayos antes de la puesta en servicio como requerido en las secciones (inspecciones antes de la puesta en servicio).

Date de fin de montage Erection completion date ___________ Fecha de conclusion de montaje Date des essais de mise en service Commissioning date ____________ Fecha de puebras para puesta en servicio

Réalisé par Performed by ____________ Realizado por Réalisés par Performed by ____________ Realizado por

Pour le client For the customer_______________ Para el cliente Pour le client For the customer_______________ Para el cliente

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

CONTRÔLE PRÉLIMINAIRES AVANT INSTALLATION PRELIMINARY INSPECTIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION INSPECCIÓNES PRELIMINARES ANTES DE LA INSTALACIÓN

Constat sur le site Verification at site Verificación en el sitio Organe de manœuvre Operating mechanism État des emballages Organo de maniobra Condition of packings Élément de pôle Condición de los embalajes Pole element Elemento de polo Sous abri Under shelter Al abrigo Réalisation du stockage Correcte Storage Satisfactory Almacenamiento Correcto Défectueuse Unsactisfactory Defectuoso Alimentation du chauffage des commandes Heating system supply of mechanisms Alimentación del calamiento de los mandos Vérification de la présence de la pression SF6 de transport Checking of transport SF6 pressure Comprobación de la presión de SF6 de transporte

Pôle Pôle A Polo

Pôle Pôle B Polo

Pôle Pôle C Polo

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

__________

Observations – Remarks – Observaciones

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

Page 2/12 Página

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Page 3/12 Página

IDENTIFICATION IDENTIFICATION IDENTIFICACIÓN

Pôle Pole Polo

Pôle A

Pôle B

Pôle C

Repère / N° têtes / N° colonnes Item / N° heads / N° columns Referencia / N° cabezas / N° columnas 1 __________ 4 __________ _______________

_______________

_______________ 7 __________

_______________ 10 __________

_______________

_______________

_______________ 2 __________

_______________ 5 __________

_______________

_______________

_______________ 8 __________

_______________ 11 __________

_______________

_______________

_______________ 3 __________

_______________ 6 __________

_______________

_______________

_______________ 9 __________

_______________ 12 __________

_______________

_______________

_______________

_______________

Nombre d’armoires Number of cubicles Numero de armarios

__

10

11

12

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

Pôle A

Fonctionnement unipolaire One pole operation ____ Funcionamiento unipolar

Pôle B

Pôle C

Fonctionnement tripolaire Three-pole operation ____ Funcionamiento tripolar

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

VÉRIFICATION APRÈS MONTAGE CHECKS AFTER ERECTION COMPROBACIÓN DESPUÈS INSTALACIÓN

Schéma de câblage Wiring diagram Esquema de alambrado

Croquis de montage Assembly drawing Dibujo de instalación

_______________

_______________

Conformité croquis montage Conformity to instalation drawing __________ Conformidad con dibujo de montaje

Conformité schéma filerie Conformity to wiring diagram __________ Conformidad con esquema de alambrado

Vérification de l’assemblage Vérification of assembly Comprobación del montaje

Conformité signalisation optique Confomity of optical indication __________ Conformidad de la señalización optica

Notice Instructions manual Manual de instrucciónes

__________

_______________

RELEVÉS DES COMPTEURS DE MANOEUVRES NOTED DOWN THE COUNTER READINGS ANOTAR NUMERO DE MANOBRIAS DE LOS CONTADORES Pôle/Pole/Polo Pôle A Relevé des compteurs de manœuvres pendant remplissage en SF6 et accouplement au pôle Noted down the counter readings during the filling up of SF6 and coupling of the pole Anotar numero de maniobras de los contadores durante el llenado en SF6 y acoplamiento al polo

Pôle/Pole/Polo Pôle B

_______

Pôle/Pole/Polo Pôle C

_______

_______

OBSERVATIONS – REMARKS – OBSERVACIONES

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

Page 4/12 Página

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Page 5/12 Página

ESSAIS DE TENUE À LA TENSION DES CIRCUITS AUXILIAIRES ET DE COMMANDE VOLTAGE WITHSTAND TESTS ON AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS ENSAYOS DE TENSIÓN SOPORTADA DE LOS CIRCUITOS AUXLIARES Y DE MANDO Appareil de mesure – test equipment

N° de série – serial number

Calibration date

Observations

Application d’une tension d’essai de kV (valeur efficace) pendant s, entre la filerie et le bâti. Application of a test voltage of ______ kV (rms value) for ______ s, between wiring and the base. Aplicación de una tensión de ensayo de kV, (valor eficaz) durante s, entre la cableria y la base.

Les moteurs et les équipements, déjà essayés conformément à leur propre spécification, ont été déconnectés pendant ces essais. The motors and equipments tested previously in accordance with their own specification were disconnected during these tests. Los motores y equipos sometidos anteriormente a ensayos de acuerdo con sus especificaciones propias fueron desconnectados durante estos ensayos.

MESURAGE DE LA RÉSISTANCE DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPAL MEASUREMENT OF THE RESISTANCE OF THE MAIN CIRCUIT MEDICIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA DEL CIRCUITO PRINCIPAL

Appareil de mesure – test equipment

N° de série – serial number

Courant continu d’essai Test direct current 100 A Corriente continua de ensayo

Calibration date

Température au moment des essais Temperature at testing time ______ °C Temperatura al momento de las pruebas Pôle Pôle A Polo

Valeurs en / Values in / Valores en : µΩ

Observations

Pôle Pôle B Polo

Pôle Pôle C Polo

1 _____

4 _____

2 _____

5 _____

3 _____

6 _____

7 _____

10 _____ 8 _____

11 _____

9 _____

12 _____

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

VÉRIFICATION DE LA PRESSION DU GAZ GAS PRESSURE CHECK COMPROBACIÒN DE LA PRESIÒN DEL GAS Appareil de mesure – test equipment

Page 6/12 Página

MPa

N° de série – serial number

Calibration date

Observations

SF6 pur / pure SF6 / SF6 puro Valeurs en pression absolue Mélange SF6/CF4 / mix SF6/CF4 / mezcla SF6/CF4 ⇒ Values in absolute pression Valores en la presión absoluta _____ % SF6 _____ % CF4 Altitude Altitude Altitud

Pression barométrique Barometric pressure ______ hPa Presión barométrica

______ m

Pression absolue / Absolute pressure Pressión absoluta Mesurage de la pression de remplissage Filling pressure measurement Medición de la presión de llenado Valeur calculée équivalente à 20°C en MPa absolue Equivalent computed values at 20°C in MPa absolute Valores computados equivalentes para 20°C en MPa absolutos

Pression relative / relative pressure Pressión relativa At 20°C and 1013 hPa Mesurage de la pression de remplissage Filling pressure measurement Medición de la presión de llenado Valeur calculée équivalente en MPa Equivalent computed values in MPa Valores computados equivalentes en MPa

Température Temperature Temperatura

______ °C

Pole 1

Pole 2

Pole 3

______

______

______

______

______

______

Pole 1

Pole 2

Pole 3

______

______

______

______

______

______

Observations – Remarks – Observaciones

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

CONTRÔLE DES DENSIMÈTRES DE SURVEILLANCE DE LA PRESSION GAS PRESSURE MONITORING DENSIMETERS INSPECTION COMPROBACIÓN DE LOS DENSIMETROS DE VIGILANCIA DE LA PRESIÓN Appareil de mesure – test equipment

N° de série – serial number

Pression barométrique Barometric pressure ________hPa Presión barométrica Température Temperature Temperatura

(pression relative en MPa) (relative pressure in MPa) (pressión relativa en MPa)

Calibration date

Pole 1

Page 7/12 Página

Observations

Pole 2

Pole 3

Seuil Seuil Seuil Seuil Seuil Seuil Seuil Seuil Seuil Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold Umbral Umbral Umbral Umbral Umbral Umbral Umbral Umbral Umbral

________

Mesurage des pressions des seuils Thresholds pressures measurement Medición de las presiones des los umbrales Valeur calculée équivalente à 20°C 1013 hPa en MPa Equivalent computed values Valores computados equivalentes

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

______

Observations – Remarks – Observaciones

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

ESSAIS DE FONCTIONNEMENT MÉCANIQUE MECHANICAL OPERATING TESTS ENSAYOS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO MECÁNICO Appareil de mesure – test equipment

N° de série – serial number

Tension d’alimentation sur le site. Supply voltage on site ____ Tensión de alimentación sobre el sitio

1

Manœuvre d’ouverture Opening operation Maniobra de apertura

Calibration date

ms

Observations

V(DC)

Pôle Pôle A Polo 4 7

10

Pôle Pôle B Polo 5 8

2

11

3

Pôle Pôle C Polo 6 9

12

C

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

SC

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

way 1 C

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

way 1 SC

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

Way 2 C

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

O

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

C

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

O

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

Manœuvre de fermeture Closing operation Maniobra de cierre

Manœuvre d’ouverture Opening operation Maniobra de apertura

DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENT OPERATING TIMES TIEMPO DE OPERACIÓN

Page 8/12 Página

Way SC

2

Cycle de manœuvre de fermeture- C ouverture Close-open operating cycle : CO Ciclo de maniobras de cierre-apertura O Durée de fermeture-ouverture Close-open time Tiempo de cierre-apertura

Séquence de manœuvre Operating sequence : O-CO Secuencia de maniobra

Durée d’ouverture-fermeture Open-close time Tiempo de apertura-cierre Durée de fermeture Close-Open time Tiempo de cierre-apertura

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

MESURAGE DES ÉCARTS DE SIMULTANÉITÉ COINCIDENCE DEVIATION MEASUREMENT MEDICIÓN DE LAS DESVIATIONES DE SIMULTANEIDAD

Entre éléments de coupure d’un même pôle Between breaking elements of a same pole Entre elementos de interrupción de un mismo polo

Entre pôles Between poles Entre polos

Page 9/12 Página

ms

Pôle Pôle A Polo

Pôle Pôle B Polo

Pôle Pôle C Polo

Fermeture Closing Cierre

______

______

______

Ouverture voie 1 Opening way 1 Apertura via 1

______

______

______

Ouverture voie 2 Opening way 2 Apertura via 2

______

______

______

Fermeture Closing Cierre

______

Ouverture voie 1 Opening way 1 Apertura via 1

______

Ouverture voie 2 Opening way 2 Apertura via 2

______

MESURAGE DES DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENT DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES MEASUREMENT OF AUXILIARY CONTACT OPERATING DURATIONS MEDICIÓN DE DURACIONES DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LOS CONTACTOS AUXILIARES

Manœuvre de fermeture Closing operation Maniobra de cierre Manœuvre d’ouverture Opening operation Maniobra de apertura

ms

Type de contact Contact type Tipo de contacto 52 b

Pôle Pôle A Polo ______

Pôle Pôle B Polo ______

Pôle Pôle C Polo ______

52a

______

______

______

52b

______

______

______

52a

______

______

______

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Page

10/12 Página

MESURAGE DE LA RÉSISTANCE DE LA CHAMBRE AUXILIAIRE MEASUREMENT OF THE AUXILIARY CHAMBER RESISTOR MEDICIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA DE LA CAMARA AUXILIAR Appareil de mesure – test equipment

N° de série – serial number

Calibration date

Pôle A Valeur en Values in Ω Valores en

DURÉE D’INSERTION DE LA RÉSISTANCE RESISTOR INSERTION TIME TIEMPO DE INSERCIÓN DE LA RESISTENCIA

Sécurité à l’ouverture de la résistance Safety at resistor opening Securitad a la apertura de la resistencia

Durée d’insertion de la résistance Resistor insertion time Tiempo de inserción de la resistencia

Observations

Pôle B

1

4

2

5

3

6

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

7

10

8

11

9

12

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

1

4

2

5

3

6

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

7

10

8

11

9

12

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

1

4

2

5

3

6

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

7

10

8

11

9

12

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

_____

ms

MESURAGE DES DURÉES DE RÉARMEMENT DE L’ORGANE DE COMMANDE MEASUREMENT OF OPERATING MECHANISM RECLOSING DURATIONS MEDICIÓN DE DURACIONES DE REARME DEL ORGANO DE MANIOBRA Durée de réarmement après un C Reclosing duration after one C Duración de rearme despues de una C

Pôle C

______

______

s

______

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

Page

11/12 Página

VÉRIFICATION DIVERSES VARIOUS CHECKINGS COMPROBACIÓNES DIVERSAS Dispositif d’anti-pompage

Ouverture de secours

Anti-pumping device Dispositivo de anti-bombeo

Emergency opening Apertura de emergencia

Fermeture localemécanique/électrique

Ouverture locale mécanique/électrique

Local closing Cierre local

Local opening Apertura local

mechanical/electrical mecánico/electrico

mechanical/electrical mecánico/electrico

Fermeture à distance

Ouverture à distance

Remote closing Cierre à distancia

Remote opening Apertura à distancia

Chauffage thermostaté

Signalisation défaut SF6 1er seuil

Thermostated heating Calefacción con termostats

SF6 fault indication – 1st thereshold Señalisación de falta de SF6 1o umbral

Chauffage permanent

Signalisation défaut SF6 2nd seuil

Permanent heating Calefacción permanente

SF6 fault indication – 2nd thereshold Señalisación de falta de SF6 2o umbral

Serrage des bornes BT

Peinture et protection contre la corrosion.

Tightening of LV terminals Apriete de las terminales BT

Painting and protection against corrosion Pintura y protección contra la corrosion

Séquence de fonctionnement

Contrôle de l’étanchéité SF6 des assemblages

Operating sequence Secuencia de maniobra

SF6 tightness testing of assemblies Comprobación de estanqueidad SF6 de los montajes

Relevé des compteurs de manœuvres Reading of operating counters Lectura de contadores de maniobra

Pôle A

Pôle B

Pôle C

_____

_____

_____

Dans le cas des appareils en T un minimum de 50 manœuvres doit être réalisées sur site. D'après norme CEI 62271-100 pour validation des accouplements réalisés sur site. For the T shaped breakers a minimum of 50 operations has to be done on site. According to IEC 62271-100 standard to validate coupling made on site. En el caso de interuptors en T, se debe llevar a cabo un mínimo de 50 maniobras en la obra. de acuerdo con la norma IEC 62271-110 para validación de los acoplamientos realizados en la obra.

EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M

010

06/03/2012

N° d’Instruction

Indice

Date de révision

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

_______________ / __________ Service Qualité Quality Department Servicio de calidad

RAPPORT D’ESSAIS AVANT MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING TEST REPORT RELACIÓN DE ENSAYOS ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN SERVICIO

OBSERVATIONS – REMARKS – OBSERVACIONES

ALSTOM Grid SAS Société par actions simplifiée au capital de 74.478.096 € Siège social: Immeuble Le Galilée – 51, esplanade du Général de Gaulle 92907 La Défense Cedex (France)

389 191 800 RCS Nanterre EB3 90 020-D4 RES 310 M N° d’Instruction

010

06/03/2012

Indice

Date de révision

Page

12/12 Página

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

CHECKLIST RPH2 WITH THE CIRCUIT BREAKER ON SITE RES 310 M RPH2 page 1/2 Breaker type : RPH2 Type : Country :

Serial number : Serial number : Site :

Item : Date :

SYSTEM DATA System frequency 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Control voltage ………. Volts Reference phase A B C If the reference voltage is different from Phase A, mind to rotate the phases on orders outputs (channel A and channel B), auxiliaries and current measurements Rated pressure : ………. Bars Switching program Shunt Reactor Capacitor Bank Transformer User Program Password : 0000 POW Time - Channel 1 Neutral isolated Time - Channel 1 Neutral grounded Time - Channel 2 Neutral isolated Time - Channel 2 Neutral grounded

L1

L2

L3

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

ms

VERIFICATIONS (or evently with rotation) Check wiring according to the electrical scheme Check the earthing of the RPH2 (on lateral flange) Measurement of operating times (A, B and C) (For multichambers CB, slowliest chamber on closing and fastest on opening) Calculation of timeshift between main contact & Csa Validation of the parameters (e.g. with TM1600 + MA61 + sinusoide generator) FINAL PARAMETERS L1 Operating time CH1 Operating time CH2 Arcing time CH1 Arcing time CH2 Aux timeshift CH1 Aux timeshift CH2

L2 ms ms ms ms ms ms

L3 ms ms ms ms ms ms

Test completion date

For the installator, prepared by :

Date de fin des essais

Pour l'installateur, établi par

For the customer

Checked by ALSTOM Grid

Pour le client

Vérifié par ALSTOM Grid

ms ms ms ms ms ms

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

Measurements for RPH2 parametrization RES 310 M RPH2 page 2/2 Phase A Csa C (ms)

MC C (ms) operation 1 operation 2 operation 3 operation 4 operation 5 Total of the column Mean value = Total/5

0 0

SC (m/s)

0 0

Un C (V)

0 0

MC O (ms)

0 0

Csa O (ms)

SO (m/s)

0 0

Un O (V)

0 0

0 0

Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O Phase B MC C (ms) operation 1 operation 2 operation 3 operation 4 operation 5 Total of the column Mean value = Total/5

SC (m/s)

Csa C (ms)

0 0

0 0

Un C (V)

0 0

Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O

MC O (ms)

0 0

Csa O (ms)

SO (m/s)

0 0

Un O (V)

0 0

0 0

Phase C CP C (ms) operation 1 operation 2 operation 3 operation 4 operation 5 Total of the column Mean value = Total/5

SC (m/s)

Csa C (ms)

0 0

0 0

Un C (V)

0 0

CP O (ms)

0 0

Csa O (ms)

SO (m/s)

0 0

Mean value MC C - Mean value Csa C 0 Mean value MC O - Mean value Csa O 0 Mean value of the 3 closing speeds (m/s) Mean value of the 3 opening speeds (m/s) MC = Main Contacts Csa = Secondary Contacts a

O = Opening C = Closing

0 0 SC = Speed of Closing SO = Speed of Opening

Un O (V)

0 0

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

CA 103 271 3

INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE

Critère d'Acceptation ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

ÉMETTEUR - TRANSMITTER : QUALITE : PM Q1\- QUALITE MONTAGE : PA Q04\I O A de la Qualité Montage QUALITY DEPARTEMENT

QUALITÉ - QUALITY ENVIRONNEMENT - ENVIRONMENT SÉCURITÉ - SECURITY

N° CRITÈRE D’ACCEPTATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA NUMBER

CA 103 271 3 INDICE : 010

01/19/2012

OBJET - TITLE : DISJONCTEUR GL315X (D) À GL317X (D) À COMMANDE MÉCANIQUE FK3.5 - MONTAGE SITE CIRCUIT BREAKER GL315X (D) à GL31X (D) WITH SPRING MECHANISM FK3.5 – SITE ERECTION

-

DESTINATAIRES - EXEMPLARIES : Pas de poste OPM en diffusion

Rédacteur(s) : Drafter visa MALATIER Thierry Signé le 01/18/2012

Approbateur(s) : Approver visa ALAMEDDINE Alaa Signé le 01/18/2012

Vérificateur(s) : Supervisor visa DOUMMAR Georges Signé le 01/18/2012

14/10/2003 20/01/2011 1/5 CA 103 271 3 010 N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Page Le présent document, propriété exclusive d’ALSTOM, ne peut être reproduit qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et ne peut être diffusé à un tiers qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et du responsable qualité. HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCTS - 130, rue Léon Blum 69611- Villeurbanne Cedex - France Tél : +33 (0)4 72 68 34 34 - Fax : +33 (0)4 72 68 39 22

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

CA 103 271 3

INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE

VALIDITÉ VALIDITY DISJONCTEUR CIRCUIT BREAKER

: GL 315X (D) à GL317X (D)

PRESSION SF6 SF6 PRESSURE

: Pre = 0,55 à 1.0 MPa (absolue)

COMMANDE MECHANISM

: MÉCANIQUE FK 3.5 : SPRING MECHANISM

DÉFINITION DES DURÉES

TIME DEFINITION

DURÉE DE FERMETURE : Intervalle de temps entre l'instant de mise sous tension du circuit de fermeture et l'instant où les contacts se touchent dans tous les pôles.

CLOSING TIME : Interval of time between energizing the closing circuit and the instant when the contacts touch in all poles.

DURÉE D'OUVERTURE : Intervalle de temps entre l'instant de mise sous tension du déclencheur et l'instant de la séparation des contacts d'arc sur tous les pôles (ou des contacts du simulateur commandés par la charge fictive).

OPENING TIME : Interval of time between the instant of energizing the opening release and the instant when the arcing contacts have separated in all poles (or simulator contacts controled by the dummy load).

DURÉE D'OUVERTURE-FERMETURE : Intervalle de temps entre l'instant de séparation des contacts dans tous les pôles, et l'instant où les contacts se touchent dans le premier pôle pendant une manœuvre de refermeture (refermeture : l'appareil est refermé automatiquement après un intervalle de temps prédéterminé -195 ms-).

OPEN-CLOSE TIME : Interval of time between the instant when the arcing contacts have separated in all poles and the instant when the contacts touch in the first pôle during a reclosing operation (reclosing : the equipment is automatically reclosed after a predetermined interval of time -195 ms-).

DURÉE DE FERMETURE-OUVERTURE : Intervalle de temps entre l'instant où les contacts se touchent dans le premier pôle pendant une manœuvre de fermeture, et l'instant où les contacts d'arc sont séparés dans tous les pôles pendant la manœuvre d'ouverture qui lui fait suite (le déclencheur d'ouverture est mis sous tension au moment où les contacts se touchent dans le premier pôle pendant la fermeture).

CLOSE OPEN TIME : Interval of time between the instant when the contacts touch in the first pole during a closing operation, and the instant when the arcing contacts have separated in all poles during the subsequent opening operation (the opening release is energizing when the contacts touch in the first pole during the closing operation).

ÉCART DE SIMULTANÉITÉ ENTRE CHAMBRES D'UN MÊME PÔLE : Pour la même manœuvre différence de temps maximale entre les instants où les contacts des chambres se touchent à la fermeture et différence de temps maximale entre les instants de séparation des contacts des chambres à l'ouverture.

DEVIATION BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE SAME POLE : For the same operation maximum deviation between the instants when the chambers contacts touch during the closing operation and maximum deviation between the instants when the chambers contacts are separated during the opening operation.

2/5 14/10/2003 20/01/2011 CA 103 271 3 010 Page N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Le présent document, propriété exclusive d’ALSTOM, ne peut être reproduit qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et ne peut être diffusé à un tiers qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et du responsable qualité.

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

CA 103 271 3

INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE

ÉCART DE SIMULTANÉITÉ ENTRE PÔLES : Pour la même manœuvre, différence de temps maximale entre les instants où les contacts de pôles se touchent à la fermeture et différence de temps maximale entre les instants de séparation des contacts des pôles à l'ouverture. Dans le cas de pôle multi-chambres, le pôle est considéré fermé quand la dernière chambre est fermée et il est considéré ouvert quand la première chambre est ouverte.

DEVIATION BETWEEN POLES : For the same operation maximum deviation between the instants when the poles contacts touch during the closing operation and maximum deviation between the instants when the pales contacts are separated during the opening operation. In the case of multichambers poles, the pole is considered closed when the last chamber is closed and it is considered opened when the first chamber is opened.

DUREE D’INSERTION DE LA RESISTANCE : sur une manœuvre de fermeture, intervalle de temps entre l’entrée en contact des contacts d’arc et l’entrée en contact des contacts de l’inséreur (résistance court-circuitée).

RESISTOR INSERTION TIME : during a closing operation, interval of time between the instant when the arcing contacts are touching and the instant when the inseror contacts are touching (resistance short-circuited).

Remarque : la durée de fermeture au sens de la norme CEI et pour les appareils avec résistance d’insertion correspond à la somme de la durée de fermeture et de la durée d’insertion telles que définies précédemment.

Note : the closing time according the IEC standard for circuit-breakers with switching resistors is equal to the sum of the closing time and resistor insertion time as défined above.

3/5 14/10/2003 20/01/2011 CA 103 271 3 010 Page N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Le présent document, propriété exclusive d’ALSTOM, ne peut être reproduit qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et ne peut être diffusé à un tiers qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et du responsable qualité.

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

CA 103 271 3

INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE

DURÉES DE FONCTIONNEMENT MECHANICAL OPERATING TIMES

(en ms à tension assignée) ( in ms at rated voltage)

DURÉES DES CHAMBRES TIMINGS OF CHAMBERS MANOEUVRE OPERATION

Minimum

Maximum

Fermeture - Closing Ouverture O1/O2 - Opening O1/O2 Fermeture par relais TEC – Closing with relay TEC Fermeture par relais Allen Bradley - Closing with relay Allen Bradley Fermeture par relais FINDER - Closing with relay FINDER Ouverture O1/O2 par relais TEC Opening with relay O1/O2 with relay TEC Ouverture O1/O2 par relais Allen Bradley Opening O1/O2 with relay Allen Bradley Ouverture O1/O2 par relais FINDER - Opening O1/O2 with relay FINDER Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO CO 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO Insertion de la résistance à la fermeture – Resistor insertion on closing

94 21 103 113 101 28

114 27 128 138 127 42

36

50

28 94 43 52 21 94 43 6

40 114 59 85 27 114 59 9

Minimum

Maximum

95 80 31 39 9 20 95 80 31 39

135 110 61 69 25 33 135 110 61 69

DURÉES DES CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES TIMINGS OF AUXILIARY CONTACTS TYPE DE CONTACT - MANOEUVRE TYPE CONTACT - OPERATION Type a / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO Type b / Fermeture de CO - Closing of CO Type a / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO Type b / Ouverture de CO - Opening of CO Type a / 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO Type b / 1ère Ouverture de O-CO - 1st Opening of O-CO Type a / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO Type b / Fermeture de O-CO - Closing of O-CO Type a / 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO Type b / 2ème Ouverture de O-CO - 2nd Opening of O-CO

4/5 14/10/2003 20/01/2011 CA 103 271 3 010 Page N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Le présent document, propriété exclusive d’ALSTOM, ne peut être reproduit qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et ne peut être diffusé à un tiers qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et du responsable qualité.

GRID ALSTOM Grid SAS 130, rue Léon Blum 69611 Villeurbanne France

CA 103 271 3

INSTRUCTION OPERATIONNELLE

ÉCART ENTRE CHAMBRES D'UN MÊME POLE (en ms à tension assignée) DEVIATIONS BETWEEN CHAMBERS OF THE SAME POLE (in ms at rated voltage) MANOEUVRE OPERATION

Maximum

Fermeture - Closing Ouverture - Opening

2 2

ÉCART ENTRE POLES (1) (en ms à tension assignée) DEVIATIONS BETWEEN POLES (1) (in ms at rated voltage) (1) Dans le cas d’un disjoncteur unipolaire, ne pas tenir compte de l’écart entre pôles. (1) In the case of single pole breaker, deviations between poles criteria do not apply.

MANOEUVRE OPERATION

Maximum

Fermeture - Closing Ouverture - Opening

5 3

DURÉES DE REARME CHARGING TIME Tension Moteur en V Motor Voltage in V toutes all

(en s à tension assignée) (in s at rated voltage) Maximum 10

RESISTANCE DE CONTACT DU CIRCUIT PRINCIPAL (sans prise de courant) (en μΩ sous courant continu de 100 A) MAIN CIRCUIT RESISTANCE (without HV terminal) (in μΩ with a 100 A direct courrent) Type de chambre Type of chamber 105/ 4 105/ 5 105/ 7 105/ 11 105/12 105/13 GL316X 5500A 105/12

Maximum 90 93 95 93 96 93 70

5/5 14/10/2003 20/01/2011 CA 103 271 3 010 Page N° d’instruction Date d’émission Indice Date de révision Le présent document, propriété exclusive d’ALSTOM, ne peut être reproduit qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et ne peut être diffusé à un tiers qu’avec l’aval du responsable de service et du responsable qualité.

Maintenance

Maintenance plan

Presentation Introduction

GL circuit--breakers use pure SF6 gas as an arc quenching medium (or a SF6+CF4 gas mixture) and require only a reduced amount of maintenance.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Maintenance plan Maintenance operations Detail of maintenance operations

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L51--004EN/05 1/6 GRID

Maintenance

Maintenance plan

Maintenance plan Maintenance frequency

Under normal operating conditions, the maintenance plan may be defined as follows : Type of examination

01--2011

Frequency

Maintenance visits

Once or twice a year

Inspections

Every five years

Overhaul

Perform when one of the following criteria is reached : D operating life time ≥ 20 years D number of mechanical cycles ≥ 3,000 D electric wear limit

Comment It is advisable to perform at least 2 CO duty cycles per year, when apparatus are scarcely used, in order to check that the circuit--breaker and associated control circuits are working properly. This necessitates circuit--breaker shutdown. It is not necessary, however to dismantle interrupting chambers and other sub--assemblies. However, it is recommended to proceed with inspection of the pole or circuit--breaker used the most, then to adapt the maintenance programme for the other breakers depending on the results observed.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--004EN/05 2/6 GRID

Maintenance

Maintenance plan

Maintenance operations Guide

The table below is a guide of the operations to be carried out at each maintenance stage : MAINTENANCE VISITS (1 or 2 times a year) INSPECTION (every 5 years) OVERHAUL (OPERATING TIME : 20 years) OVERHAUL (MECHANICAL OPERATIONS : 3 000 cycles) OVERHAUL (ELECTRICAL WEAR : see “Electrical wear limits”)

J J J J J Operation counter reading. Overall inspection : appearance (corrosion, paintwork, signs of overheating). Check operation of permanent heating. Check condition J J J J of air vents. If the circuit--breaker is fitted with an SF6 dial densimeter or a pressure gauge, check SF6 pressure (or SF6+CF4 J J gas mixture). It is advisable to perform at least 2 CO duty cycles per year, when apparatus are scarcely used, in order to check that circuit--breaker and associated control circuits are working properly. Check SF6 densimeter thresholds. Then adjust pressure J J to its rated value. Check tightening of parts not subjected to pressure J J J (frame -- deck -- cubicle). Check tightening of low voltage terminals (∗ 6 months J J J after commissioning). Check relay operation. J J J Change door seal, side panels seal and roof seal. J

J J J J J

J

∗

J J J J Measure operating times for poles and auxiliary contacts. Carry out operations at recommended duties and rated voltage. J J Change (or recondition) interrupting chambers. Check that the damper piston for the opening of the J control presents no oil leak.

J J J J

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--004EN/05 3/6 GRID

Maintenance

Maintenance plan

Detail of maintenance operations Caution

DURING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ALL POSSIBLE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO PROTECT PERSONNEL WORKING ON THE EQUIPMENT. (Disconnect CB from HV system, remove LV supplies etc.)

General condition of the apparatus

The apparatus should be subjected to visual inspection. If patches of corrosion are found begin reconditioning of the affected parts. The table below gives the process respecting surface finish and protection : Support

Inspection

Galvanized steel

Oxidized parts

Light scratches Painted galvanized steel or painted aluminium alloy

Deep scratches or flaking

Action D Thorough brushing of oxidized parts. D Degreasing with solvent. D Application of a coat of zinc paint. D Thorough degreasing with solvent. D Application of a coat of lacquer using a brush. D Scouring of paint surface with emery paper 400. D Thorough degreasing with solvent. D Application of a coat of primer, then drying for 24 h. D Application of a coat of polyurethane lacquer using a brush.

Products used : D RUMCOAT EEVA primer by DERIVERY ref. 333103. D Polyurethane lacquer 780 by DERIVERY, ref. depending on color of equipment. Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--004EN/05 4/6 GRID

Maintenance

Maintenance plan

Detail of maintenance operations, continued SF6 pressure gas

For a circuit--breaker equipped with a ”dial--type” SF6 gas densimeter, check the position of the needle. Needle position

Colored area

Direction

GREEN

None

YELLOW

Perform a topping--up operation.

Abnormally low density, find the origin of the leak and contact ALSTOM Grid After--sales Service.

RED

NOTE : If the intersection is in either the yellow or red zone, without any particular indication from the electrical contact densimeter, verify the concordance of different information sources to find the defective element and then replace it.

Operating device

Air--vents should be clean, free of dust and unobstructed. If necessary clean using a solvent. Make sure that the permanent resistors are working properly by checking that these give off heat and that there are no overheating marks (a zone notorious for this). For thermally controlled resistors, check that energizing and de--energizing takes place correctly at voltage supply terminals by means of a thermostat (recommended thermostat temperature : +5°C). If necessary, change resistors found to be defective. For the opening damper, if any leak is observed, please contact ALSTOM Grid, After--Sales Department, to proceed with any changes

Operation counter

Read indications given by the counter(s) and note these on the inspection sheet ”Maintenance visits”. The number of circuit--breaker operations recorded influences future maintenance operations. Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--004EN/05 5/6 GRID

Maintenance

Maintenance plan

Detail of maintenance operations, continued Electrical densimeter thresholds

Check the electrical contact SF6 densimeter thresholds. If the values found are outside required tolerances replace the densimeter.

Tightening of mountings

Check and adjust, with a torque wrench, the tightening torques of screws on sub--assemblies not subjected to gas pressure. The tightening torques are given in paragraph ”Tightening torques”.

Relay operation

Check relay operation by executing the following circuit--breaker sequences : -- closing lock--out, -- automatic opening (where applicable), -- anti--pumping.

Tightening LV terminals

With the electric cubicle out of service, check that the connectors and tips of conductors are tightened correctly and check the torque of connection mountings. Tool used : 4 mm diameter screw driver , for terminals of the ”Entrelec” type (for example). CAUTION : SCREWS OVER--TIGHTENED.

ON

TERMINALS

MUST

NOT

BE

Insulating envelopes

Check the condition of insulating envelopes, these should be free from impact marks, splintering, cracks, dust deposits, pollution etc... If necessary, clean these using a dry rag. If anomalies are found contact : ALSTOM Grid, After--sales Service in order to change the defective parts.

Interrupting chambers

Check the condition of interrupting chambers. This operation necessitates complete dismantling of the interrupting chamber to gain access to the elements to be inspected and should obligatorily be performed by ALSTOM Grid, After--sales Service -- to be contacted before all operations of this kind, preferably at the maintenance planning stage.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--004EN/05 6/6 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical wear limits

Electrical wear limits Estimation

Electrical wear can be determined by means of the curve below. This curve corresponds with the formula : ΣNI2 = 28,000 kA2 (*) N = number of interruptions on value I. Example : it is possible to perform 70 interruptions on a current of 20 kA. (*) Normal guarantee. In certain special operation conditions, other values may be guaranteed.

Diagram

I (kA) 63

20 10

2

10

20 30

50

100

500

1000

3000

Number of interruptions

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--053EN/03 1/2 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical wear limits

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--053EN/03 2/2 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Presentation Necessary tools

List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation : Mark

Diagram

Designation Gauge 0...0,765 MPa

(11) Gauge 0...1 MPa

In this module

Reference Number HBL--02842117 + HB0005499001 1 HBL--02842118 + HB0005499001

(17)

Pressure reducer 0...1 MPa

HBL--02557392 + HBLN55161601

1

(5)

Connection valve block

HB0005649001

1

Set of seals

HB0000270121

1

Test lamp

HBL--02861501

1

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3 4 6 7 8

Preparing the densimeter Linking the densimeter on the control tool Densimeter threshold inspection Replacing the densimeter Putting away the control tool Particular case with two (2) densimeters

09--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--108EN/05 1/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Preparing the densimeter Introduction

The densimeter is located at the base of the pole of the circuit--breaker, and is joined to the SF6 (or SF6+CF4) gas volume of the circuit--breaker. To realize the electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection, it is imperative to isolate the densimeter volume from the pole SF6 (or SF6+CF4) gas volume.

Process

The table below gives the process to preparing the densimeter : Step 1

Action Remove the densimeter (1), held in place by screws (8), on the housing cover (2) of the circuit--breaker.

Diagram

x3 8 2

H M6--20

2

Remove the screws (14).

1

x3 14 H M6--20

3

4

5

09--2011

Install the seal (16) on the connection valve block (5).

Install the connection valve block (5) on the housing cover (2), of the circuit--breaker, using screws (8). Install the densimeter (1) on the connection valve block (5) using screws (14). NOTE : Before installing, check the presence of seals on the densimeter.

16 5

5

2

x3

x3

8 H M6--20 0,7 daN.m

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

14 1

H M6--20 0,7 daN.m

L51--108EN/05 2/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Linking the densimeter on the control tool Process

The table below gives the process to link the densimeter on the control tool : Step 1

2

Action Check that the “REGULATION” screw (20) -- of the gauge (11) -is in “valve closed” position (screwed).

Connect the pipe (12) of the gauge (11) on the valve (24) of the connection valve block (5).

Diagram 11

20

5 12

24 11

12

3

Briefly open the SF6 gas bottle tap (21) and the cock (22) of the pressure reducer to eliminate any air inside the pipe (23) (approx. 20 s at low flow--rate). Connect the pipe (23) on the valve (10) of the gauge (11).

11

21

10

23 22

SF6

09--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--108EN/05 3/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Densimeter threshold inspection SF6 gas pressure adjustment

The table below gives the steps of SF6 gas pressure adjustment of the connection valve block (5) : Step 1

2 3

Action Open the SF6 gas bottle tap (21) and adjust gas output by acting on the cock (22) of the pressure reducer (reduced flow rate). Close the tap (21) from time to time to check pressure on the gauge (11).

Comment

See the module “Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure to using the pressure gauge (tool)”.

Start filling again until the required pressure is reached. Close in this order : the tap (21), then the cock (22).

21

11

Open

SF6

Closed

22

Continued on next page.

09--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--108EN/05 4/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Densimeter threshold inspection, continued Testing

The table below gives the steps of densimeter testing : Step 1

2

3

Action Connect a test lamp to the “Alarm pressure for the insulation” pae densimeter threshold. Calculate the effective pressure at which the “Alarm pressure for the insulation” pae contact switches over -- corrected in keeping with temperature and local atmospheric pressure. D Create a leak by unscrewing the “REGULATION” screw (20) -of the gauge (11) --, making sure that the contact switches over at the previously calculated value. D Proceed in the same way to check the contact of “Minimal pressure for the insulation” pme.

Comment Connection to the terminal block of the operating mechanism in accordance with the electrical diagram. Value pae : see technical characteristics). See the module “Calculation of the SF6 gas filling pressure to using the pressure gauge (tool)”.

11

20

If one of the thresholds does not comply with the specified value, replace the densimeter.

09--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--108EN/05 5/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Replacing the densimeter Process

The table below gives the process to replace the densimeter : Step 1

Action Disconnect the pipe (12) from the valve (24) of the connection valve block (5). Screw the valve--cap (25) on the valve (24).

Diagram 24 12 25 5

2

Remove the densimeter (1), held in place by screws (14), on the connection valve block (5).

5

x3

1

14 H M6--20 3

4

09--2011

Remove the connection valve block (5), held in place by screws (8), on the housing cover (2) of the circuit--breaker. NOTE : If the connection valve block (5) is any more used, see the next paragraph “Putting away the control tool”.

2

x3

5

8

Install new seals (26) and (27) on the densimeter (1), referring to “Preparing and installing static seals” in ”Erection general 2 procedures”. Install the densimeter (1) on 27 the housing cover (2), of the circuit--breaker, using 26 screws (8). 1

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

H M6--20

x3 8 H M6--20 0,7 daN.m

L51--108EN/05 6/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Putting away the control tool Process

The table below gives the steps of putting away the control tool : Step 1

2

Action Take precautions to remove the seal (16) from the connection valve block (5) and put it away into the “SET OF SEALS” box of the densimeter threshold inspection case. Install screws (14) on the connection valve block (5) Put away the connection valve block (5) into the case.

Diagram 16 5

x3 5

14 H M6--20

3

Disconnect the pipe (23) from the valve (10) of the gauge (11).

11

10

SF6

09--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

23

L51--108EN/05 7/8 GRID

Maintenance

Electrical contact densimeter threshold inspection

Special case with two densimeters Instructions

09--2011

If the apparatus is equipped with a second densimeter, repeat the operations on pages two to seven.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--108EN/05 8/8 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Presentation Warning

BEFORE ALL INTERVENTION ON THE OPERATING DEVICE, MAKE SURE THAT THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER IS OPEN ANDITS POSITIONINDICATOR IS IN THE POSITION BELOW.

Circuit--breaker Open

Closing spring Released

NEVER WORK THE OPERATING DEVICE WHEN THIS IS NOT COUPLED TO THE CIRCUIT--BREAKER.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Positions of optical signalization Safety measures Preparing the operating device Replacing an opening or closing electro--magnet Resumption of service Lubrication Cleaning the windows

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4 5 6 8 9

L51--304EN/04 1/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Positions of optical signalization “A” position Circuit--breaker Open

Closing spring Loaded

“B” position Circuit--breaker Closed

Closing spring Released

“C” position Circuit--breaker Closed

Closing spring Loaded

Circuit--breaker Open

Closing spring Released

“D” position

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 2/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Safety measures Circuit--breaker general preparing

The table below gives the steps to prepare the circuit--breaker to work safely : Step 1 2 3

Release the springs

Action Comment Isolate the circuit--breaker from Shut down the circuit--breaker, the network. de--energize and earth it. Switch--off the supply circuit of the reloading motor. Check the SF6 pressure gas. Make sure that the SF6 pressure gas is ≥ pme. Below this level, no mechanical operating is allowed.

The table below gives the procedure to release the closing spring and the opening spring depending the circuit--breaker state : If the circuit--breaker position is ...

Closed

Open

Check the optical signalization

In the operating device, activate the opening handle and the closing handle like below : 1 -- Open 2 -- Close 3 -- Open Activate the closing handle and the opening handle like below : 1 -- Close 2 -- Open

Check that the operating mechanism’s optical signalization shows the symbols below :

Circuit--breaker Open

01--2011

Action

Closing spring Released

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 3/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Preparing the operating device Introduction

In order to perform certain maintenance operations inside the operating device it is necessary to remove some cabinet parts.

Removing side panels

The table below gives the steps of side panels removing : Step 1

Action Remove the nuts (2) from the left side panel (3).

Diagram

x2 2 M8 3 2

3

01--2011

Take hold of the left side panel (3) from underneath, pull slightly towards the outside, then downwards to remove it.

3

Proceed in the same way for the right side panel.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 4/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Replacing an opening or closing electro-- magnet Process

01--2011

The table below gives the steps of replacing an opening or closing electro--magnet : Step 1

Action Disconnect the supply wires from the coil (9).

Diagram

2

Extract the blade spring (10) by pressing outwards on the rivet with a finger.

3

Remove the core (11).

10

4

Remove the faulty coil and replace it by a new one carrying the same reference.

11

5

Reinstall the core (11).

6

Reinstall the blade spring (10).

7

Connect supply wires to the new coil (9).

10

9

9

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 5/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Resumption of service Installing the side panels

Insert the side panel (3) under the edge of the roof plate (4). Press it down to insert the mounting screws and fasten using new nuts (2). 4 3

x2 2 M8 1,6 daN.m

Continued on next page.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 6/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Resumption of service, continued Energizing

The table below gives the resumption of service steps of the circuit--breaker pole : Step 1 2

Check the optical signalization

Action Comment Re--energize the closing and opening circuits. Switch--on the motor supply cir- The motor starts--up and recuit. loads the closing spring.

Check that the operating mechanism’s optical signalization shows the symbols below :

Circuit--breaker Open

Conclusion

01--2011

Closing spring Loaded

The circuit--breaker is ready for normal use.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 7/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Lubrication Principle

No future lubrication will be necessary. The bearings and rollers have been lubricated in our workshops with special grease : ASEOL SYLITEA 4--018 This grease can easily endure very low temperatures and has an excellent resistance to ageing. So that its qualities are not modified during use, it is prohibited to : D Mix this grease with any other lubricant. D Lubricate later with any other oil. D Spray parts of the apparatus with a protective liquid against corrosion or with any kind of lubricating oil. Mixture with other lubricants can cause the layer of grease to become too hard.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 8/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

Cleaning the windows Recommended product

To clean the windows, use exclusively soapy water.

DO NOT USE SCOURING PAD.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 9/10 GRID

Maintenance

Intervention on the FK3-- 5 operating device

This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L51--304EN/04 10/10 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Presentation Introduction

Special tooling is necessary for : + commissioning, , maintenance of the circuit--breaker. Only the tools and accessories specified on ordering are delivered. Commercially available tools (e.g. : spanners, torque wrenches, spirit levels...) are not supplied.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 6

Special tools Accessories

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 1/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Special tools Table of special tools

The table below gives the ALSTOM special tools (SF6 case) : NUMBER

DESIGNATION

HBLD001875.. +,

EMPTY TRANSPORT CASE (OPTIONAL)

HBLN55000401 +,

FILLING TOOL

HBL--02842117 + HB0005499001 +, HBL--02842118 + HB0005499001 +,

USE Transport of SF6 gas filling tools and control tools. Inspection of densimeter thresholds.

SF6 filling, topping--up.

PRESSURE GAUGE 0...0,765 MPa

SF6 filling, topping--up. Inspection of densimeter thresholds.

PRESSURE GAUGE 0...1 MPa

HBL465059004 ,

WATER PRESSURE GAUGE (OPTIONAL) ,

Checking for leaks

HBL--02557392 + HBLN55161601 +,

PRESSURE REDUCER 0...1 MPa

SF6 filling, topping--up. Inspection of densimeter thresholds.

HB0005649001 ,

CONNECTION VALVE BLOCK

Inspection of densimeter thresholds.

HB0000270121 ,

SET OF SEALS

Inspection of densimeter thresholds.

Continued on next page.

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 2/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Special tools, continued Table of special tools, continued

The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM special tools : NUMBER

DESIGNATION

USE

HB0001652002 +, (x4/station)

LIFTING STRAP (3m)

Handling of the pole.

HB0001652001 +, (x4/station)

LIFTING STRAP (6m)

Handling of the pole.

HBL--02236071 + (x4/station)

LIFTING SHACKLE

Handling of the pole.

HBLD00786901 + (x8/station)

WASHER

Handling of the column.

HBLN55069303 + (x4/station)

RING BOLT

Handling of the column.

HB0004570001 + (x1/pole installed in factory)

HB0000482002 +, (x1/station)

Blocking tool of the pole operating shaft BLOCKING TOOL for replacing the operating device.

CENTRING SPINDLES

Chambers/column coupling.

Continued on next page.

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 3/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Special tools, continued Table of special tools, continued

The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM special tools : NUMBER

DESIGNATION

USE

HB0015532001 +, (x1/station)

STOP

Chambers/column coupling.

HB0000571001 +, (x1/station)

LEVER

Installing the operating device.

HB0000504001 +, (x1/station)

PROTECTION

Chambers/column coupling.

HB0015511001 +, (x1/station)

COUPLING PIN

Chambers/column coupling.

HBLN55001903 +

VACUUM PUMP 110/220V 50 Hz (4,5 m3/h) Vacuum operation in pole.

HBLN55001904 +

VACUUM PUMP 115/230V 60 Hz (4,5 m3/h)

Continued on next page.

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 4/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Special tools, continued Table of special tools, continued

The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM special tools : NUMBER

DESIGNATION

USE

HBLN55000406 +

UNIVERSAL CONNECTION 1/2” GAZ AND 1/2” NPT

Vacuum operation in pole.

HBLD00001901 +,

LEAK DETECTOR

Checking gas--tightness of SF6 filling plug. SF6 leak detection.

TEST LAMP

Inspection of densimeter thresholds. Inspection of interruption contact wear.

CRANK HANDLE

Spring reloading.

HBL--02861501 ,

HB0005220001 FK3--2 , HB0006053007

FK3--4 / FK3--5 ,

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 5/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Accessories Table of accessories

The table below gives the ALSTOM accessories : NUMBER HBL--01861432 +,

DESIGNATION

USE

42 kg SF6 BOTTLE

SF6 filling topping--up.

SF6 BOTTLE

SF6 filling topping--up.

SF6 BOTTLE

SF6 filling topping--up.

SF6 BOTTLE

SF6 filling topping--up.

CF4 BOTTLE

CF4 filling topping--up.

CF4 BOTTLE

CF4 filling topping--up.

HBL--01818336

LOCTITE 262 (50 ml)

Screw locking.

HBL--01818327

LOCTITE 225 (250 ml)

Screw sealing.

HBL--01835265

MOLYKOTE 111 GREASE

Preparation of SF6 seals.

HBL--01835203

GREASE MOBILUX EP3

Lubricating screws before tightening to torques.

HBL--01861435 +,

HBL--01861434 +,

HBL--01861443 +,

HBL--01861455 +,

HBL--01861454 +,

23 kg

10 kg

8 kg

32 kg

14 kg

Continued on next page.

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 6/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

Accessories, continued Table of accessories, continued

The table below gives the continuation of ALSTOM accessories : NUMBER

03--2012

DESIGNATION

USE

HBL--01835106

VASELINE (80 g)

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--01835118

CONTACTAL GREASE

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--01835251

GREASE ASEOL

General lubrication.

HBL--02212337

SCOTCH BRITE A -- VF

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--01831320

ABRASIVE PAPER A 400

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--02212334

RAG

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--02211842

ROUND BRUSH Nº4

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--02211831

BRUSH Nº16

Preparation of electrical contact surfaces.

HBL--01861262

CAN OF ISOPROPANOL (1 l)

Preparation of SF6 seals.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 7/8 GRID

Annexes

Tooling and accessories

This page is intentionally blank.

03--2012

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L60--028EN/02 8/8 GRID

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SUMMARY

of PRODUCT SAFETY SHEETS for equipment * manufactured by ALSTOM GRID - AHT

SUBJECT

Reference N°

Revision

Summary

PS 0000EN

04

Working environment

PS 0001EN

03

Handling Operations

PS 0002EN

03

Pressurized Equipment

PS 0003EN

03

SF6 : Use and Handling.

PS 0004EN

03

Chemicals

PS 0005EN

03

Electrical Equipment

PS 0006EN

03

Machinery

PS 0007EN

04

Operation

PS 0008EN

04

Maintenance

PS 0009EN

04

Remarks

Not applicable to pneumatically operated circuit breakers

* : excluding lightning arresters.

PS 0000EN

04

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2001-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/1 Signature

Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

This page is intentionally blank.

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

WORKING ENVIRONMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Any negligence as regards site organisation may cause an accident.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

All remedial action, for all life-cycles of the equipment, must be carried out in a safe working environment.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

PS 0001EN

03

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/2 Signature

Page

TRANSPORT

INSTALLATION

START-UP

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1 Personnel : -

Appropriate clothing, gloves, helmet, safety boots, harness, etc..

-

The personnel concerned must be familiar with the basic working regulations governing a given work station: mechanical, dielectric, pressure hazards, etc..

2 Handling Equipment : -

This must be in good working order, regularly maintained, properly adjusted and compliant with the standards in force in the country of use.

3 Tools in General : -

Only use tools appropriate to the type of work to be carried out.

4 Working Area : -

Make sure the floor is safe (free from oil, blunt objects, etc.).

-

The site must be properly demarcated and kept clear.

PS 0001EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

2/2 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

HANDLING OPERATIONS

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Any handling operation may involve danger :

-

for the personnel,

- for the equipment being handled, - for the installations or equipment in the vicinity.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

As a general rule, handling operations must be carried out by personnel familiar with the basic handling regulations, using equipment in good working order, and wearing the appropriate protective clothing or equipment. Ensure that the condition of the cases is such that they can be safely handled (state of the wood, shock-resistance, etc.).

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

PS 0002EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

1/3 Page

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

TRANSPORT

INSTALLATION

START-UP

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

Handling operations must be carried out by personnel familiar with the basic handling regulations.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Personnel must be qualified to operate equipment, cranes, overhead conveyors, etc..

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

lifting

Equipment in proper working order : -

Equipment must be checked and maintained regularly in accordance with local regulations.

-

All equipment must be properly housed.

Familiarity with the load to be handled (see details on the case).

Use of the appropriate handling equipment : -

Type of sling(s),

-

Correct slinging methods,

-

Use of special ALSTOM handling equipment.

Follow the handling instructions on : -

the cases (pictorial symbols: centre of gravity, slinging points, etc.),

-

the assembly instructions.

Compliance with the relevant work station safety instructions (proximity of electrical equipment).

Operator Safety : -

use of gloves, helmets, safety boots, etc.,

-

loads not to be carried with personnel underneath.

PS 0002EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

X

2011-03-21 Revision date

2/3 Page

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

X

X

X

X

X

X

Ensure that cases have not been damaged during handling or prolonged storage. Follow the stacking instructions.

X

X

It is essential to open cases from the top and to take care when unpacking.

X

X

X

operated

Bring insulating jacket working pressure back to transport pressure (300 hPa maximum).

PS 0002EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

OPERATION

Before handling any mechanically component, disable the springs.

X

START-UP

X

INSTALLATION

X

Handling of insulating jackets at transport pressure (300 hPa maximum).

TRANSPORT

Before handling any hydraulically operated component, bring oil pressure back to atmospheric pressure.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

MAINTENANCE

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

2011-03-21 Revision date

3/3 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

This page is intentionally blank.

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

PRESSURIZED EQUIPMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Our equipment includes gas pressure assemblies (SF6, nitrogen, air, etc.) or fluids (oil).

WORK REQUIREMENTS. • Comply with the storage, transport and operating instructions supplied with our equipment. • Before initial filling and pressurizing, check the overall condition of the shielding concerned : -

no signs of impact, splitting or chipping on the porcelain components, etc.,

-

no visible damage to hoses and/or rigid pipes (cuts, folds, corrosion, etc.) or to fittings and metal protection (accumulators, tank, etc.).

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

As a general rule, all work on pressurized equipment must be carried out by qualified personnel.

PS 0003EN

03

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/3 Signature

Page

INSTALLATION

START-UP

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

1

TRANSPORT

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Pressurized Equipment : General. 1.1

Comply with the assembly instructions shown on both our equipment and the gas bottles.

1.2

Before starting work on any pressurized piece of equipment, make sure there is no pressure.

X

X

X

X

1.3

Before any handling, check to see how the equipment is fixed to its frame and how the frame is itself anchored.

X

X

X

X

1.4

High-pressure pipes must be fixed or otherwise made safe.

X

X

X

X

1.5

Before initial pressurization, check that all circuits are properly sealed.

X

X

X

X

1.6

Never tighten a pressure fitting.

X

X

X

X

1.7

Ensure that for every bolted connection for a volume under pressure there is an appropriate and properly fastened bolt at each relevant point.

X

1.8

It is strictly forbidden to lift or otherwise move a piece of equipment inflated to a pressure in excess of 300 hPa of gas.

X

X

1.9

Before giving any orders to move equipment, check visually or by ear that all the relevant pipe fittings are tight.

X

X

X

X

1.10 Comply with the standard instructions governing the use of compressed gas bottles (e.g. keep the bottle away from any source of heat).

PS 0003EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

X

X

X

2011-03-21 Revision date

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

2/3 Page

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

X

X

START-UP

X

INSTALLATION

X

TRANSPORT

X

PACKING

OPERATION

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

2.1

See SF6 Safety Sheet.

X

X

X

X

2.2

An effective pressure of 300 hPa, used for the transport and storage of our products, is not regarded as a potential hazard.

X

X

X

2.3

Always fill the unit using the appropriate equipment, which should include a safety valve.

X

X

X

2.4

Do not inflate over and above the prescribed pressure.

X

X

X

2.5

It is strictly forbidden to release SF6 to atmosphere. All discharged gas must without exception be recovered.

X

X

X

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

2

3

SF6 Pressure Equipment.

X

X

Hydraulic Equipment.

3.1

Circuit Purging. This must be done under pressure. Use the appropriate equipment.

3.2

Hydraulic Control Unit. The doors must be kept shut except when control tests are being carried out.

PS 0003EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

X

X

X

2011-03-21 Revision date

X

3/3 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

This page is intentionally blank.

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

SF6 Use and Handling

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is a gas which in its basic state is colourless, odourless and tasteless. It is not toxic, but it cannot sustain life. It is a heavy gas that is dispersed slowly into the atmosphere. In its natural state, SF6 is delivered and stored in pressurized tanks (bottles or spheres) at a pressure of approximately 20 bar at 20°C (in its liquid form) and complies with IEC standard 376. However, under the effect of the electric arc, the SF6 molecules break up and the elements mostly recombine during cooling either due to extinction of the arc or by regeneration caused by the presence of active absorbent charges within the circuit breaker. Various chemical reactions, associated with the volatilization of the materials in contact with the electric arc, create either fluoridized or sulphurous secondary gas products or solid products in the form of metallic fluoride powder ; or again, in the presence of traces of water or moisture, hydrofluoric acid or sulphur dioxide. In the life-cycle of the equipment, SF6 can be observed not only in its pure state, but also in its contaminated state : -

the use of new SF6 for filling or adding,

-

leaks under normal operating conditions,

-

maintenance involving the opening of circuit breakers containing old SF6 (decomposition products),

-

abnormal conditions (internal arc fault causing the shielding to break),

-

circuit breaker recycling on end of life-cycle.

WORK REQUIREMENTS. Follow the instructions for the transport of pressurized containers. The storage of these containers is governed by the same storage regulations as compressed gas bottles : -

keep away from any source of heat and in a cool, dry and well-ventilated area, always fit a pressure reducing valve.

PS 0004EN

03

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/3 Signature

Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

Whilst SF6 in its pure state is not toxic, the decomposition products have varying degrees of toxicity. They may irritate the skin, the eyes and the mucous membranes; and in massive amounts may cause serious lesions (oedema, heart failure, circulatory disorders and unconsciousness). However, very rapidly and before there is any real danger, signs such as a pungent smell, irritation of the mucous of the nose, the eyes and the mouth will give a warning and the personnel concerned will have sufficient time to take the necessary safety actions. Where the gas is used or handled within enclosed premises, ensure adequate ventilation, especially low down. If the gas is inhaled, the area concerned must be evacuated immediately. Under normal operating conditions, leaks are exceptionally minor and not critical, even when the gas contains impurities (due to the regenerating filters in the circuit breaker). Filling and where necessary topping up operations must be carried out using the appropriate tools. During maintenance operations, or at the end of the life-cycle, dust inside the equipment must be removed by a vacuum extractor and the operator should wear a mask. Gas recovery must be carried out using the appropriate gas recovery equipment. Gases and decomposition products must be treated and/or disposed of by specialist organizations. Under extremely abnormal conditions (e.g. break in the shielding) in an enclosed space, individual protective equipment is recommended. Lastly, it is forbidden to smoke, drink, eat or keep food in the vicinity of open SF6 equipment, whether indoors or outside (harmful dust).

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

It is essential that both the fitter and the user read IEC Technical Report 1634 regarding the use and handling of sulphur hexafluoride gas.

PS 0004EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

2/3 Page

X

X

X

X

Contaminated SF6

PS 0004EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

X

X

1996-03-18 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

Pure SF6

MAINTENANCE

X

OPERATION

X

START-UP

TRANSPORT

Transport of SF6

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INSTALLATION

PACKING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

X

X

3/3 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

This page is intentionally blank.

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

CHEMICALS

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Generally speaking, the products used for installation and commissioning are bought chemical products, namely : -

Hydraulic oil

-

Grease

-

Loctite

-

Touching-up paint

-

Isopropanol

-

Drying agents

These must be kept in their original packing and the tops replaced after use. Some packing products require careful handling as they may contain preservatives. WORK REQUIREMENTS. As a general rule, chemical products must be used and stored away from any source of heat. Smoking is to be avoided. Avoid contact with the skin and any splashes to the eyes. Take the basic health and safety precautions. Products and packing must be destroyed in accordance with local environmental regulations. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

Other products: SF6 (see relevant sheet)

PS 0005EN

03

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/2 Signature

Page

X

Hydraulic Oil

X

X

X

X

Consumables (Grease & Paint) (Isopropanol)

X

X

X

X

Loctite

PS 0005EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

X

1996-03-18 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

X

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

X

MAINTENANCE

INSTALLATION

X

OPERATION

TRANSPORT

Drying Agents

START-UP

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

X

X

X

X

X X

2/2 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Our equipment is subjected to high and low tension loads that could expose the personnel to the risk of electrocution.

WORK REQUIREMENTS. The operating company is responsible for ensuring compliance with the safety instructions governing high tension. The basic regulations in respect of low tension installations must also be complied with.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

All work on high-tension networks and low-tension installations must be performed by qualified operators wearing personal protective clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.

PS 0006EN

03

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/2 Signature

Page

INSTALLATION

START-UP

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

1

TRANSPORT

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

X

X

X

X

X

High Tension. 1.1 Comply with the regulations governing the work station. 1.2 In the case of items equipped with capacitors, make sure they are discharged prior to removal and short-circuited while work is being carried out.

2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Low Tension. 2.1 Prior to any work on the low-tension circuit or equipment, cut off the power supply.

X

X

2.2 When replacing an electrical component on the control equipment, follow the safety instructions shown in the "Machinery" safety sheet.

PS 0006EN Sheet N°

03 Revision

1996-04-04 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

2/2 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

MACHINERY

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. Our equipment contains moving parts (linkage, levers, etc.), reserve power (springs, accumulators, etc.) and pressurized sheathing ; the associated hazards are dealt with in safety sheet "Pressurized Equipment" PS 0003/A.

WORK REQUIREMENTS. Follow the relevant ALSTOM operating and maintenance instructions. Prior to any work on the control equipment and the motion transfer mechanism, disable the springs on mechanically operated units and bring pressure back to zero for hydraulically operated units.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

As a general rule, work on the control equipment and transmissions must be performed by qualified operators wearing personal protective clothing and using the appropriate tools and equipment.

PS 0007EN

04

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/2 Signature

Page

START-UP

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

X

X

X

X

2.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off all power to the reset motor.

X

X

X

X

X

2.2 Deactivate the opening and closing springs in accordance with ALSTOM instructions.

X

X

X

X

X

2.3 Make sure that all safety rules are complied with while the work is being carried out.

X

X

X

X

X

3.1 Before any work is carried out, cut off power to the motor pump.

X

X

X

X

X

3.2 Reduce the pressure of the hydraulic circuit to zero.

X

X

X

X

X

1

Moving Parts.

1.1 Before any work is carried out on transmission components, ensure that the control equipment has been deactivated. 2

3

TRANSPORT

X

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

INSTALLATION

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

Spring-operated Mechanism.

Hydraulic Mechanism.

PS 0007EN Sheet N°

04 Revision

1996-04-04 1st issue

2011-03-21 Revision date

2/2 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

OPERATION

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. If the unit shows any sign of an unwanted condition, it must be examined by the user.

WORK REQUIREMENTS.

The operators concerned must be suitably qualified and must comply with the normal operating and maintenance instructions issued by ALSTOM. Depending on the severity of the fault observed, the necessary corrective measures must be taken, e.g :

- replenish the SF6 gas in the event of a leak, -

isolate the system in the event of a major malfunction.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT.

PS 0008EN

04

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/2 Signature

Page

X

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING

X

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

INSTALLATION

START-UP

COMPLY WITH THE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTION PROVIDED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES :

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

TRANSPORT

PACKING

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

Opening malfunction : -

to do with the sequencing chain, following a mechanical fault.

Cut-off failure.

X

External dielectric flash-over.

X

SF6 pressure drop due to either : -

major leak (switch to 2nd threshold), no 1st threshold alarm complement.

Loss of motor power : -

oil, compressed air, component failure.

X

X

X

X

X

Activation of safety device, if fitted. Use only the appropriate recommended by ALSTOM. Abnormal noise.

PS 0008EN Sheet N°

04 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

products

X

X

X

X

X

2011-03-21 Revision date

X

2/2 Page

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

SAFETY SHEET

MAINTENANCE

CAUSE OR ORIGIN OF HAZARD. • To ensure safe and unimpaired operation of the equipment, regular maintenance is essential. Neglected maintenance can create hazards. • Maintenance operations involve hazards that must be guarded against. WORK REQUIREMENTS. • Comply with the maintenance programme and service intervals shown in the ALSTOM manuals. • In addition, every maintenance operation must comply with the following requirements : -

it must be carried out by suitably qualified personnel,

-

both the work involved and the associated hazards must be clearly identified beforehand,

-

the tools and equipment used (standard or specific to ALSTOM) must be appropriate and in proper working order,

-

any replacement parts must be ALSTOM parts.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. OBSERVE ALL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENTLY ACCEPTED PRACTICES AS WELL AS THOSE LAID DOWN IN THE DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED WITH THE EQUIPMENT. •

Refer to the relevant SAFETY sheets.

•

The safety instructions below are general and not exhaustive. They should therefore be modified and/or supplemented for all specific maintenance operations to be carried out.

PS 0009EN

04

G. BERNARD

1998-08-12

Sheet N°

Revision

Written by

Date

Signature

J. VIAT

2011-03-21

Approved by

Date

1/2 Signature

Page

MAINTENANCE

SCRAPPING & RECYCLING X

Obtain as much information as possible from the user regarding the condition of the unit.

X

X

X

Check that the unit is earthed both upstream and downstream.

X

X

X

Demarcate the work area.

X

X

X

Ensure that the operator is equipped with the personal protective clothes and equipment required (safety glasses, gloves, safety boots, harness, etc.).

X

X

X

Ensure that the equipment used is compliant and in good condition (scaffolding, slings, suspended platforms, electrical equipment, tools, etc.).

X

X

X

Ensure that the safety instructions in respect of each particular hazard are complied with.

X

X

X

PS 0009EN Sheet N°

04 Revision

1996-03-18 1st issue

START-UP

X

INSTALLATION

X

TRANSPORT

Identify the equipment to be worked on and ensure it is switched off.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PACKING

OPERATION

GRID High Voltage Switchgear

2011-03-21 Revision date

2/2 Page

Point--on--Wave Controller Series RPH2 Service Manual

02--2004

58.020.034EN GRID

This page is intentionally blank.

02--2004

58.020.034EN GRID

RPH2 Service Manual CONTENTS 1. IN GENERAL

6

1.1. Handling of electronic equipment

6

1.2. Unpacking

6

1.3. Storage

6

1.4. Installation

6

1.5. Technical data

7

2. INTRODUCTION

8

2.1. Using the handbook

8

2.2. Models available, Assembly

8

2.3. Additional modules 2.3.1. Signal module: Option S 2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I 2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A 2.3.3.1 Option A0 2.3.3.2 Option A1 2.3.3.3 Option A3 2.3.3.4 List of available models

8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10

2.4. Elements on the front of the device 2.4.1. Graphic display 2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display 2.4.2. Key-operated switch 2.4.2.1 Position "OFF" 2.4.2.2 Position "OPERATION" 2.4.3. LED indicators 2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green) 2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red) 2.4.4. Keys 2.4.5. Serial interface

10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12

2.5. Menu system 2.5.1. Menu structure

12 14

3. APPLICATION NOTES

16

3.1. General Description of the Functions 3.1.1. Synchronized switching 3.1.1.1 Closing 3.1.1.2 Opening

16 16 16 17

Page 1/73 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02-12 Compiled: 2004-02-12 THS/ U.Samitz

Approved: 2004-02-12 VEV/ K. Bauer

File code: RPHDOC_E.DOC

3.1.2. Circuit breaker 3.1.3. RPH2 structure 3.1.4. Function of the RPH2 3.1.4.1 Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum 3.1.4.2 Breaking of an inductive current 3.1.4.3 Switching program

17 17 18 18 19 20

3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors 3.2.1. Closing 3.2.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 3.2.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral 3.2.2. Opening 3.2.3. Data on circuit breaker required 3.2.3.1 Closing 3.2.3.2 Opening 3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

20 21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22

3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups 3.3.1. Closing 3.3.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 3.3.1.2 Networks with isolated Neutral 3.3.2. Opening 3.3.3. Data on circuit breaker required 3.3.3.1 Closing 3.3.3.2 Opening 3.3.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

22 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23

3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors 3.4.1. Closing 3.4.1.1 Networks with grounded Neutral 3.4.1.2.Networks with isolated Neutral 3.4.2. Opening 3.4.3. Data on circuit breaker required 3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy

23 23 23 23 24 24 27

3.5 Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines

28

4 FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES

29

4.1 Signal Module: Option S 4.1.1 Alarm outputs 4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs 4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time 4.1.2.2 Remote reset 4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization 4.2 Analogue Module: Option A 4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation 4.2.2 Temperature Compensation 4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation 4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors 4.2.5 Adaptive Control

29 29 29 29 31 31 31 32 33 35 37 37

4.3 Current Module Option I

38

5 RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM

39

Page 2 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.1 System data 5.1.1 Password 5.1.2 System Frequency 5.1.3 Control Voltage 5.1.4 Rated Pressure 5.1.5 Switching Program 5.1.5.1 User Program 5.1.6 Function Channel 1 5.1.7 Language 5.1.8 Time / Date 5.1.9 New Password 5.1.10 Selftest Start 5.1.11 Selftest Interval

39 39 39 40 40 40 41 42 42 42 42 43 43

5.2 CB Data 5.2.1 Operating Time CH1 5.2.2 Operating Time CH2 5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1 5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2 5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshift CH1 5.2.6 Auxiliary Timeshift CH2 5.2.7 Adaptive Control 5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor 5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1 5.2.7.3 Adaptive Times CH2 5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times 5.2.8 Compensation 5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1 5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1 5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1 5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1 5.2.12.1 Delta_t xx°C 5.2.13 kU2 Voltage CH2 5.2.14 kP2 Pressure CH2 5.2.15 Temperature Compensation CH2 5.2.16 Table Temp. CH1 5.2.16.1 Delta_t xx°C

44 44 44 44 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 46 46 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 48 48

5.3 Analogue Data 5.3.1 Thresholds 5.3.1.1 Current max. 5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max. 5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min. 5.3.1.4 Temperature max. 5.3.1.5 Temperature min. 5.3.1.6 Pressure max. 5.3.1.7 Pressure min. 5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim 5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec 5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage 5.3.5 Temperature 5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA 5.3.5.2 Value at 20 mA

48 48 48 49 49 49 50 50 50 51 51 52 52 52 53

Page 3 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.3.6 Pressure 5.3.6.1 Value at 4 mA 5.3.6.2 Value at 20 mA

53 53 54

5.4 Alarms 5.4.1 Reset Obligatory 5.4.2 Lock-Out 5.4.3 Alarm List 5.4.3.1 Lock-out 5.4.3.2 Frequency min 5.4.3.3 Frequency max. 5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak) 5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure 5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure 5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate 5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded 5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated 5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR 5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR 5.4.3.12 Selftest CH2 ERROR 5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min 5.4.3.14 Command Time CH2 min 5.4.3.15 Operating Time min 5.4.3.16 Operating Time max. 5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure 5.4.3.18 Archive Full 5.4.3.19 Archive Failure 5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min 5.4.3.21 Control Voltage max. 5.4.3.22 Temperature min 5.4.3.23 Temperature max. 5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault 5.4.3.25 Pressure min 5.4.3.26 Pressure max. 5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault

54 54 55 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 59 59 60 60 60 60 60

5.5 Measurement 5.5.1 Current Graphs 5.5.2 Measured Times 5.5.2.1 Command OUT 5.5.2.2 CB Signal received 5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time 5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time 5.5.3 Frequency 5.5.4 Current (RMS) 5.5.5 Control Voltage 5.5.6 Actual Temperature 5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation 5.5.8 Additional Operating Times 5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1 5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2 5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1 5.5.8.4 Temperature CH2 5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1 5.5.8.6 Pressure CH2

60 60 61 61 61 62 62 62 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65

Page 4 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3) 5.5.10 Pressure (L1)

66 66

5.6 Auxiliary functions 5.6.1 Alarm Input 5.6.2 Alarm Output 5.6.3 Error Type

66 66 67 67

5.7 Switching archive

67

6 COMMISSIONING

68

6.1 Commissioning preliminaries 6.1.1 Settings 6.1.1.1 Factory Settings 6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings 6.1.2 Inspection 6.1.3 First operation

68 68 68 68 69 70

Page 5 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

1.

IN GENERAL

1.1. Handling of electronic equipment A person can cause an electronic potential of many thousands of volts. When this potential is discharged into appliances with semiconductor components, serious damage can occur which is not immediately evident, but can still impair operational reliability. The electronic switching circuit of the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller meets all the requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the EN 50 081-1/1992 and EN 50 082-2/1995. Care is necessary only if the plug-in unit is pulled out of the casing. Take care not to touch the plug contact on the back! For storing and transporting loose plug-in units, we recommend a conductive fail packaging. As soon as the plug-in unit is properly installed in the casing, no safety measures are necessary at all.

1.2. Unpacking Despite the general robust construction of the Point-on-Wave Controller, it must be handled with care before installation. Before accepting the Point-on-Wave Controller it should be checked for damage which could have originated during transportation. If you have cause for complaint, please refer to the transport company and notify a person responsible at ALSTOM Grid.

1.3. Storage If the Point-on-Wave Controller is not to be installed immediately upon receipt, it should be stored in a place which is free of dust and moisture, in its original packaging. If a moisture-absorption bag is in the packaging, leave it as it is. The effectiveness of the drying agent is impaired if the non-protected bag is subjected to the surrounding conditions. Before the Point-on-Wave Controller is placed in the box again, warm the drying bag slightly in order to regenerate the drying agent. Storage temperature: -40 °C to +70 °C

1.4. Installation The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller can either be installed in a switchboard or a suitable frame with the provided material (panel cut-out see diagram 58.001.115), or a special fitting is available for wall mounting (see diagram 58.001.116).

Page 6 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

We suggest the control room or the relays room as the most favourable installation site. Installation in a heated outdoor control cubicle is also possible. Installation directly in the operating mechanism of a circuit breaker is not provided for (please contact ALSTOM Grid regarding this). The position should be well lit in order to make inspections easier. Wiring is carried out according to the wiring diagram which is enclosed with every Point-on-Wave Controller. Take care to earth the housing appropriately.

1.5. Technical data supply voltage Nominal: 48 V - 250 VDC (= CB trip coil voltage): Operative range: 35 V - 300 VDC special power supply for 48 V -44 % ANSI-Standard available power consumption: < 20 W reference voltage (L1/N):

Nominal: Operative range:

rated frequency: power consumption of measuring inputs:

100/√3 V; 220/√3 V AC 15 V -105 VAC; 30 V - 250 VAC 16 2/3 / 50 / 60 Hz ±10 % < 2 VA

maximum permissible current of CB trip coil: minimum command time: polarity of command impulse: resolution of time setting: accuracy of switching times over temperature range -55 °C to +55 °C

14.5 A/ phase for 1 sec. 100 ms positive 0.1 ms

current inputs: rated short time current: accuracy of current measurement

1 A and 5 A 100 x In / 1 s ±10% (0.5 In ... 4 In)

measurement control voltage input temperature measurement: input pressure measurement: accuracy of measurement by RPH2: control voltage ambient temperature hydraulic pressure

internal 4...20 mA of Pt 100 4...20 mA of pressure sensor

signalling inputs: (e.g. CB or neutral ground disconnector position, CB aux. contacts, external reset)

potential free contacts required

indication outputs: contact rating

potential free contacts 24-250 V AC/DC ± 25 %, max. 70 VA/ max. 3 A

communication port:

RS 232, DC decoupled

±0.3 ms

±3% ±3% ±3%

Page 7 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

2.

INTRODUCTION

2.1. Using the handbook This handbook will guide the user through the setting-up procedure for the Point-onWave Controller. It explains the additional functions of this appliance, and how they are selected and used. In addition, some examples of its usage are given, the theory behind it examined and explained, and which circuit breaker and main data are absolutely necessary for operation. The handbook shows the complete list of all menu points with cross-references to the chapter with the accompanying descriptions. The menu point order for the individual modules is shown on this list as well. Notes on checking and commissioning are given in the last chapter.

2.2. Models available, Assembly The RPH2 is available in 2 basic models: • RPH2-1xx: for one switching function (closing or opening alternatively) • RPH2-2xx: for 2 switching functions channel 1 for closing, channel 2 for opening (only when using the given switching programs) The 7 alarm LED's are active, however there is only one alarm contact (Alarm 1) available. In addition, there is an alarm contact "Device not ready". The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is assembled in a modular system. The function can be extended through the combination of various modules. Extending the function at a later date is only possible by the manufacturer. The casing is a standard 19 inch sub-rack, with half width for one device or alternatively with full width for 2 devices. After removing the 4 external screws of the front panel, the plug-in unit on the grip rail can be removed from the housing. Safety notes see 1.1.

2.3. Additional modules 2.3.1. Signal module: Option S This module offers 6 alarm outputs (alarm 2 to alarm 7) and 6 optoelectronic coupler inputs. Inputs 1-3 serve as circuit breaker monitors via its auxiliary contacts. With this the pole operating times can be measured. Resolution 0.5 ms. Input 4 serves as an input for a remote-reset. Inputs 5 and 6 are not in use at present. A further input is used for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be switched in parallel with other Point-on-Wave Controllers.

Page 8 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

2.3.2. Current measurement module: Option I With this the phase currents during the switching process can be recorded and graphically displayed. Data from the last 4 switching operations (curves, amplitudes) are stored in a non volatile memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are shown after feeding in the current transformer ratios.

2.3.3. Analogue module: Option A Independent of the breaking system and the kind of operating mechanism, the operating times of a circuit breaker change in dependence on certain service parameters: With reduced control voltage at the circuit breaker coil there is less energy available to change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating time extends itself. (Valid for all types of operations.) By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry out the switching movement changes. The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electrical resistance of the trip coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas are dependent on the temperature. In addition, changes of length in the driving linkage and the porcelains occur. All these parameters influence the operating time in different ways. In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by some milliseconds. The RPH2 with option A is in the position to compensate these operating time alterations. There are inputs available for the measurements acquired when measuring the control voltage, pressure and temperature for the compensation of pole operating times. The control voltage is measured directly in the RPH2 at the input terminals for the auxiliary voltage. There are no external measuring devices necessary. For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer banks (2 conductor constructions, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal (4...20 mA) are necessary. The supply for the transducer bank is effected by the RPH2. Up to 8 RPH2's can be switched in parallel on one temperature sensor. When measuring pressure, an individual transducer is necessary for each circuit breaker (option A1) or each circuit breaker pole (option A3). The measuring range of the measuring instruments depends on the requirements and can be simply parameterized in the RPH2. Three types of this additional module are available: 2.3.3.1. Option A0 Measuring and compensation of control voltage and temperature (for springloaded drives)

Page 9 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

2.3.3.2. Option A1 Same design as 2.3.3.1, however with additional measurement and compensation for hydraulic pressure (for hydraulic drives which have a mutual pressure generation for all three poles). 2.3.3.3. Option A3 Like 2.3.3.2, however for circuit breakers which have pressure generation per pole. 2.3.3.4. List of available models RPH2-1 RPH2-2

RPH2-1S RPH2-2S

RPH2-1I RPH2-2I

RPH2-1A0 RPH2-2A0

RPH2-1A1 RPH2-2A1

RPH2-1A3 RPH2-2A3

RPH2-1SI RPH2-2SI

RPH2-1SA0 RPH2-2SA0

RPH2-1SA1 RPH2-2SA1

RPH2-1SA3 RPH2-2SA3

RPH2-1SIA0 RPH2-1SIA1 RPH2-1SIA3 RPH2-2SIA0 RPH2-2SIA1 RPH2-2SIA3

2.4. Elements on the front of the device The device identification is located on the right side of the grip rail. The top line shows the model variation code and the serial number is located on the line beneath. With any queries or questions please state both numbers.

2.4.1. Graphic display To show the adjusted and measured values. The top line shows each active menu point. Underneath four menu lines appear. The last line (under the drawn line) is the status line. The feed in or measured values appear here. The digits which are pressed into the front panel underneath the display indicate the positions for setting the alarms.

>

Sy s Pa Sy Co Ra

L1

t s s n t

em D a t a swo r d t em F r e q u e t r o l Vo l t a ed Pr essu r 00 12345 L2 L

n g e 0 6 3

cy e 0 78

2.4.1.1 Setting Contrast of LC-Display Turn key-operated switch to „OFF“. Press the [Enter] button and hold it. Turn the key-operated switch to „OPERATION“. The contrast changes within its limits from dark to light. When the optimal contrast for your requirements is reached, release the [Enter] button.

Page 10 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Note: The whole contrast-range of the display is adjustable. Therefore the display becomes nearly transparent or dark respectively for a moment. The selected contrast is stored in a non-volatile memory.

2.4.2. Key-operated switch 2.4.2.1. Position "OFF" The RPH2 is blocked. No switching operation is possible. The green LED "READY" is extinguished and the alarm contact "Device not Ready" (-X6: 12/13) closes. 2.4.2.2. Position "OPERATION" After switching to this position the device carries out an internal test. After the averaging of the analogue measured values (pressure, temperature, control voltage) is completed (it takes approx. 20 sec.) and no failure is present, the device switches to "OPERATION" and the green LED "READY" lights up. The alarm contact "Device not ready" (-X6: 12/13) opens.

2.4.3. LED indicators 2.4.3.1.LED "READY" (green) Status Steady light

Function The device is ready for operation

Dark

Key-operated switch in "OFF" position Averaging of analogue measured values is still not completed (see 1.2) Voltage reference is missing or frequency is not in the permitted range (±10 %) The device has identified an internal failure.

Blinking

The password is activated, the device can be parameterized. All functions are active.

2.4.3.2.LED 1 to 7 (red) To show the parameterized alarms. The LED's are assigned to the alarm relays 1 to 7. Next to the LED's is a window in which the user's message texts can be placed. For a withdrawn cassette, the input tag with the texts is inserted from the top behind the front. As insert use a sheet of paper 41 mm x 90 mm. Status Steady light

Function An alarm has occurred. The LED remains alight until the alarm is active (regardless of whether the "Quitt" button has been pressed). As long as the LED is alight, the affiliated output relay is also activated.

Page 11 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Status Blinking

Function An alarm has occurred which is marked as „Rest obligatory“ After pressing the "Quitt" button two possibilities arise: 1) The LED extinguishes, i.e. the alarm was no longer active when reseted, the output relay is released. 2) The indicator switches over to permanent light, i.e. the alarm is still active, the output relay remains energized. As long as the LED is alight or blinks, the affiliated output relay is energized.

2.4.4. Keys [Enter] [+] [-] [Esc] [Quitt]

Menu point open / confirm Cursor up / increase value Cursor down / decrease value Leave menu point / break-off action Acknowledge alarm / alter current scale (together with [+] or [-])

2.4.5. Serial interface To connect the RPH2 to a computer via a standard interface cable. Pinning of connection cable (Nullmodem Cable): PC Serial Port

1

RPH2 Serial Port

1

PC Serial Port

RPH2 Serial Port

1

1

:

9 pin plug

9 pin plug

25 pin plug

9 pin plug

2.5. Menu system The user surface is organized in several master menu points, each with linked submenu points. For their part, the sub-menus can contain further sub-menus. The last line (under the drawn line) is the status line. Adjusted or measured values are shown here. The menu structure depends on the RPH2 configuration, e.g. with a device without a current measuring module (option I) menu points are not available which are connected with his function. There are menu cells which can only be read and others where an alteration to the setting can be carried out. Changes are only possible after the password has been activated. After feeding the auxiliary voltage, the first four lines of the master menu (1st plane) appear on the display. Move the menu cursor (black triangle on the left side of the display) up and down using the [+] an[-] keys. The first four lines of the 2nd plane are shown after pressing [Enter]. Analogues are also valid for the 3rd plane. The menu

Page 12 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

cursor is moved again using [+] or [-]. The contents of the cells are shown in the status line. If a value is to be altered, move the menu cursor to the desired plane and line. After pressing [Enter], a blinking cursor appears under the first status line position. Change this position using [+] or [-]. [Enter] moves the cursor right to the next position. With [Esc] the input mode can be left at any time without storing the changes made. After feeding in the last position the message

Accept: YES - NO appears in the status line. The input is confirmed with [Enter]. The new value is stored and the menu cursor appears. [Esc] enables the input procedure to be repeated. After completing the input, turn the key-operated switch to "OFF" and then to "OPERATION" or start the selftest via the menu. After the selftest the data in the system is accepted. The following pages show a list of all the available menu points. The cross-references to the chapter with the detailed function description are in the column "Chapt.". The column "Module" shows with which model variation this menu is available. The following coding system applies: -1 RPH2 with one switching function -2 RPH2 with two switching functions Ax Analogue module in all models with module A A1 Analogue module, e.g. Option 1 I Current measuring module Option I S Signal module Option S Menu points without a particular task are available on all models.

Page 13 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

2.5.1. Menu structure Chapter Module 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 Ax 5.1.4 Ax 5.1.5. 5.1.5.1 5.1.6 -1 5.1.7 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.10 5.1.11

Level 1 System Data

5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.7.1 5.2.7.2 5.2.7.3 5.2.7.4 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.12.1 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.15 5.2.16 5.2.16.1 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.1.1 5.3.1.2 5.3.1.3 5.3.1.4 5.3.1.5 5.3.1.6 5.3.1.7 5.3.2 5.3.3

CB Data

Level 2

Level 3

Password System Frequency Control Voltage Rated Pressure Switching Program User Program Function CH1 Language Time/Date New Password Selftest Start Selftest Interval

Operating Time CH1 Operating Time CH2 Arcing Time CH1 Arcing Time CH2 Aux.Timeshift CH1 Aux.Timeshift CH2 Adaptive Control ->

S S SAx SAx SAx SAx SAx Ax Ax A1,A3 Ax Ax Ax Ax A1,A3 Ax Ax Ax

Weighting Factor Adaptive Times CH1 Adaptive Times CH2 Reset Adaptive Times Compensation kU1 Voltage CH1 kP1 Pressure CH1 Temp. Comp. CH1 Table Temp. CH1 -> Delta_t xx°C kU2 Voltage CH2 kP2 Pressure CH2 Temp. Comp. CH2 Table Temp. CH2 -> Delta_t xx°C Analogue Data Thresholds

I Ax Ax Ax Ax A1,A3 A1,A3 I I

Page 14 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Current max (peak) Control Voltage max Control Voltage min Temperature max Temperature min Pressure max Pressure min Rated Curr. prim Rated Curr. sec

Chapter Module

5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.5.1 5.3.5.2 5.3.6 5.3.6.1 5.3.6.2 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.3.1 5.4.3.2 5.4.3.3 5.4.3.4 5.4.3.5 5.4.3.6 5.4.3.7 5.4.3.8 5.4.3.9 5.4.3.10 5.4.3.11 5.4.3.12 5.4.3.13 5.4.3.14 5.4.3.15 5.4.3.16 5.4.3.17 5.4.3.18 5.4.3.19 5.4.3.20 5.4.3.21 5.4.3.22 5.4.3.23 5.4.3.24 5.4.3.25 5.4.2.26 5.4.3.27 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.2.3 5.5.2.4 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5

Level 1 Analogue Data (contin.)

Ax Ax Ax Ax A1,A3 A1,A3 A1,A3

Level 2

Level 3

Actual Contr. Voltage Temperature Value at 4 mA Value at 20 mA Pressure Value at 4 mA Value at 20 mA Alarms Reset obligatory Lock-out Alarm List Lock-out Frequency min Frequency max Current max (peak) Ref. Voltage Failure RTC Impulse Failure Neutral intermediate Neutral grounded Neutral isolated Selftest ERROR Selftest CH1 ERROR Selftest CH2 ERROR Command Time CH1 min Command Time CH2 min Operating Time min Operating Time max Drive Mech. Failure Archive Full Archive Failure Control Voltage min Control Voltage max Temperature min Temperature max Temp. Transd. Fault Pressure min Pressure max Pressure Transd. Fault

I S

-2 -2 S S S

Ax Ax Ax Ax Ax A1,A3 A1,A3 A1,A3 Measurement I

Current Graphs Measured Times Command OUT CB Signal received Calculated Op. Time Measured Op. Time

S Ax S I Ax

Frequency Current (RMS) Control Voltage

Page 15 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Chapter Module 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 5.5.8.1 5.5.8.2 5.5.8.3 5.5.8.4 5.5.8.5 5.5.8.6 5.5.9 5.5.10 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.7

3.

Level 1 Measurement (contin.)

Ax Ax Ax Ax Ax Ax Ax A1,A3 A1,A3 A3 A1

Level 2

Level 3

Temperature Temperature f. Comp Additional Op. Times Voltage CH1 Voltage CH 2 Temperature CH1 Temperature CH2 Pressure CH1 Pressure CH2 Pressure (L1/L2/L3) Pressure (L1) Aux. Functions

S S

Alarm Output Alarm Input Error Type Switching Archive

APPLICATION NOTES

3.1. General Description of the Functions The RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller is a three-phase control device for circuit breakers with single pole drives. It can be used for both the energizing and de-energizing of high voltage devices.

3.1.1. Synchronized switching 3.1.1.1. Closing Energizing of transformers, reactors and capacitors is normally effected three-pole - for all 3 phases simultaneously. In doing this the point on wave is left up to chance. If closing is carried out in this manner, high inrush currents with high DC components are unavoidable. When energizing capacitors additional high switching surges can occur. The results are unwanted operation of protection devices and repercussions on machines and network. The inrush currents and switching surges can be reduced to an acceptable rate by installing closing resistors at the circuit breaker. The costs for such closing resistors are very high, due to the mechanical expenditure. Besides, the necessarily high energetic absorbtivity of the resistor material sets relatively restricted limits of practicability. By selecting a suitable switching time the physical causes of these high inrush currents can be counteracted. This possibility is effected through synchronized switching with the RPH2. This enables the three poles of a circuit breaker to be controlled independently.

Page 16 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

3.1.1.2. Opening The de-energizing of shunt reactors is a critical process liable to generate re-ignitions between circuit breaker contacts. This means very high stress for the insulation of both the shunt reactor and the circuit breaker. If the contact separation takes place a sufficient amount of time before the current zero crossing through suitable circuit breaker control, to ensure a gap capable of withstanding the transient recovery voltage at interruption.

3.1.2. Circuit breaker The mechanical closing time of the circuit breaker is defined as the time between the electrical command to the operating coil and touching of the main contacts. On the other hand, the opening time is the time between the electrical command and the separation of the main contacts. The operating times of circuit breakers, independent of the breaking system and the type of operating mechanism, changes in dependence on certain service parameters: • With reduced control voltage at the operating coil there is less energy available to change the electrical control commands into a mechanical action. The operating time extends itself. (Valid for all types of operating drives.) • By altering the hydraulic pressure on hydraulic drives, the energy available to carry out the switching movement changes. • The ambient temperature is the most complex parameter of influence. The electrical resistance of the operating coils, the oil viscosity and the pressure of the SF6 gas are all dependent on the temperature. Moreover, there is expansion of operating rods and porcelains. All these parameters influence the operating time in different ways. In the extreme, each of these 3 parameters can alter the operating time by some milliseconds. The RPH2 is in the position to compensate these operating time variations.

3.1.3. RPH2 structure The outstanding features of the RPH2 are: • Microprocessor control with a switching command time resolution of 0,1 ms. • Large graphic display to show the adjusted and measured values ( in German, English and French or user defined language) • Easy setting via keypad or PC interface. • Analogue module for measuring control voltage, pressure and temperature, for the compensation of changes in operating time.

Page 17 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

• Current measuring function for the graphic display of the line currents during switching. • Extensive alarm functions • Two switching functions (CLOSING and OPENING) with one device are possible. • Switching programs with fixed switching times for the most frequent applications. • A free program is available for special user-defined applications (e.g. switching unloaded lines). • Extensive archive function. The most important data for the last 1000 operations are stored in a non-volatile memory and are available for diagnostic purposes. • Comfortable PC software for setting and read-out archive data. All data can be stored and printed out. If the user cannot find sufficiency with the three languages mentioned previously, then the display can be translated into the user's national language using PC software. • Compact housing for flush mounting or wall mounting.

3.1.4. Function of the RPH2 The phase-synchronous trigger-signal is taken from the network voltage (phase L1). The trigger-signal is based on the voltage-zeros of the reference voltage. The network voltage is also used as a reference for circuit opening. The amount of phase shift between current and voltage is almost always +90°el. or -90°el. (A deviation of ±1°el. creates a variation of ±0,06 ms of the switching point.) The controller's mode of operation shown below. The diagrams are only single-phased and shown without transient effects which may possibly occur. 3.1.4.1. Energizing of an inductive load in the voltage maximum (Fig. 1) At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The next voltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the given operating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that current starts at the required time (3). Through the unavoidable pre-arcing in the circuit breaker pole the current begins before actually touching the contacts. Contact touching happens at the pre-arcing time after the voltage maximum (optimum switching time). The required pre-arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all three phases. The two other phases are controlled in the same (independent) manner.

Page 18 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Figure 1 2 System voltage

3 Current

t arc CB-ON

1

command t d

to RPH2

CB operating time

Command by RPH2

4 CB main contact

t_arc...pre-arcing time of CB t_d... delay time of RPH2

time

3.1.4.2. Breaking of an inductive current At any point on wave whatever, the control impulse is given to the RPH2 (1). The next voltage zero crossing is the internal synchronizing impulse (2). Depending on the given operating time for the respective pole, a time delay t_d is calculated so that contact separation occurs at the required time (3). In the time between contact separation and the following current zero crossing, the contacts have separated so far that after the current breaking in the zero crossing (4),an adequate contact gap exists to withstand the transient recovery voltage. The required arcing time t_arc is separately adjustable for all three phases. The two other phases are controlled in the same (independent) manner. Figure 2 2 System voltage

3 4 Current

t_arc CB-OFF

1

command to RPH2

t_d

CB operating time

Command by RPH2

CB main contact

t_arc...arcing time of CB

time

t_d ...delay time of RPH2

Page 19 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Whether the system neutral is grounded or isolated, the RPH2 registers the signal contacts of the neutral earthingswitch and automatically selects the correct switching time. 3.1.4.3. Switching program The RPH2 already has several preconfigured switching programs for various uses. The treatment of the system neutral of the network is automatically taken into consideration. The trigger point for the switching times is the beginning of the period that is determinated by the zero crossing of the voltage L1-N (reference voltage). The given delay times in table 1 are given in milliseconds after the trigger point. They show the moment where current flow begins or ends (point (4) in figures 1 and 2). The RPH2 automatically takes pre-arcing and breaking times into account. The following programs are available: • Transformer (transformer, transformer bank, three-core reactor) • Reactor (reactor group) • Capacitor bank • Free program The following table is based on a phase sequence of the network of L1= reference L2= reference - 120° L3= reference - 240° Table 1: Delay times of the various switching programs. Switching programs Transformer

Neutral GROUNDED ISOLATED

Reactor

GROUNDED ISOLATED

Capacitor

GROUNDED ISOLATED

Operation CLOSING OPENING CLOSING OPENING CLOSING OPENING CLOSING OPENING CLOSING OPENING CLOSING OPENING

L1 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 5 (4.2) 0 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3) 5 (4.2)

Delay time L2 10 (8.3) 1.7 (1.4) 0 10 (8.3) 1.7 (1.4) 1.7 (1.4) 0 10 (8.3) 6.7 (5.6) 1.7 (1.4) 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3)

L3 10 (8.3) 8.3 (6.9) 0 10 (8.3) 8.3 (6.9) 8.3 (6.9) 0 10 (8.3) 3.3 (2.8) 8.3 (6.9) 5 (4.2) 10 (8.3)

Values in () for 60 Hz. The free program enables the user to select whatever switching time for both switching functions (if available) and for both types of neutral treatment.

3.2. Switching of Transformers and Reactors For this switching task select the program "Transformer" in the menu [System Data] [Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1. For transformers with primary windings in delta connection the program for isolated neutral must be used (short circuit the terminals -X6:8 with -X8:11 of the RPH2).

Page 20 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

3.2.1. Closing 3.2.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral Circuit breaker closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient processes. With earthed-neutral networks the obvious thing to do would be to switch offset the three phases L1, L2 and L3 in their respective voltage peak, i.e. timewise each one about a third of the period. Due to the mutual coupling of the individual phases (via the iron core in three-core transformers or via the low-voltage winding in transformer banks) this switching sequence did not have the desired effect. The first phase L1 is closed in the voltage peak (a quarter period after the voltage zero crossing of the reference voltage L1-N). Because the first phase is laid to nominal voltage, the flux in the relevant core rises also to its nominal value. This flux closes via both the remaining, nongenerated cores, to each a half. If closing of the two remaining phases occurs a quarter period after the first, current flow can start immediately and without transient process (switching sequence L1-L2+L3). 3.2.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral With an isolated neutral, closing of one phase makes no sense. Two phases must be closed first (L2 and L3) and the obvious thing to do would be to select for the switching time the voltage peak of the phase to phase voltage (i.e. zero crossing of the reference voltage L1-N). Switching on the third phase occurs about a quarter period later, at the peak of voltage L1 (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).

3.2.2. Opening For switching off transformers and three leg reactors with the RPH2, please read point 3.3.2 "Switching off Reactor Groups".

3.2.3. Data on circuit breaker required The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2: The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles (see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms. 3.2.3.1. Closing For closing at the correct time, the pre-arcing time of the breaker at the closing voltage (see table 2) according to the phases and the treatment of the system neutral. Table 2: Closing Voltage (Un= system voltage (rms.)) Phase Neutral Grounded Neutral Isolated L1 √(2/3)*Un 1.5*√(2/3)*Un L2 ½*√2*Un ½*√2*Un L3 ½*√2*Un ½*√2*Un If the exact value cannot be obtained from the breaker manufacturer, the optimum closing time can be determined through switching tests with oscillographical measurements of the inrush currents. For RPH2 with option I, the inrush currents are directly shown by the device (curve course and peak value). For the tests it is advisable

Page 21 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

to begin with an assumed pre-arcing time of 3 ms at √(2/3)*Un, 2.5 ms at ½*√2*Un and 4.5 ms at 1.5*√(2/3)*Un. 3.2.3.2. Opening Data of the optimum arcing time in order to guarantee a sure current breaking in the next zero crossing. See 3.3.3 for further information

3.2.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy With regard to the accuracy of the switching time, closing in the voltage peak is not so critical. By closing at 1 ms before or after the peak, the voltage still amounts to 95 % of the peak value, at 2 ms at least 81 % (valid for 50 Hz). Therefore an accuracy of ±2 ms at 50 Hz or 60 Hz is sufficient. See 3.3.4 for opening values

3.3. Switching of Reactor Groups For this switching task select the program "Reactor" in the menu [System Data] [Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1. If the RPH2 is only to be used for opening, then this program can also be used to switch three core reactors (switching moments are identical to the transformer program).

3.3.1. Closing 3.3.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral Closing takes place in the voltage peak in order to prevent transient processes. With grounded neutral networks the three phases L1, L2 and L3 are closed in their respective voltage peak, i.e. timewise each one offset about a third of the period, as there is no coupling between the phases (switching sequence L2-L1-L3). 3.3.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral Closing runs according to the same principles as in the program for transformers (see 3.2.1.2).

3.3.2. Opening Breaking of small inductive currents, as is with reactors, can lead to high switching surges if current chopping or restriking in the circuit breaker occurs. Contact separation should take place a sufficient time before current zero crossing so that after current breaking the contact gap is great enough to withstand the recovery voltage. The switching times given in table 1, indicate the moment of current breaking. The necessary arcing window is taken into account by the RPH2 through the arcing time.

3.3.3. Data on circuit breaker required The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2:

Page 22 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three circuit breaker poles (see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms. 3.3.3.1. Closing The pre-arcing times of the circuit breaker must be known. • Pre-arcing time of the breaker in the voltage peak: equal value for all three phases with grounded neutral or for phase L1 with isolated neutral. • Pre-arcing time with partial voltage: for phases L2 and L3 with isolated neutral (see table 2) 3.3.3.2. Opening The optimum arcing time input determines the arcing window for a secure current breaking, free from restrikes, in the next zero crossing. The value is given by the breaker manufacturer. In order not to come into conflict with unavoidable operating time tolerances, contact separation should begin 1,5 ms after zero crossing at the earliest, i.e. do not select an arcing time of longer than 8,5 ms (6,8 ms at 60 Hz). About a quarter period as arcing time is regarded as standard time.

3.3.4. Necessary Switching Time Accuracy For circuit breaker closing, point 3.2.4 applies (standard value ±2 ms). For circuit breaker opening, the breaker should achieve an operating time accuracy of ±1,5 ms.

3.4. Switching of unloaded Capacitors For this switching task select the program "Capacitor" in the menu [System Data] [Switching Program]. The switching times are specified as seen in table 1.

3.4.1. Closing High inrush currents and high voltage surges can occur with the random switching of capacitors, especially if switching takes place in the voltage peak. The effects of parallel switching of capacitors is particularly serious. Particularly high voltage surges can occur, due to reflections at the end of radial networks. 3.4.1.1. Networks with grounded Neutral Closing takes place in the voltage zero crossing of the related phase-to earth voltage, i.e. all phases offset one third of the period (switching sequence L1-L3-L2). 3.4.1.2. Networks with isolated Neutral As a unipolar switching makes no sense, two phases are simultaneously closed in the voltage zero crossing of their phase to phase voltage. The third phase follows a quarter period later (switching sequence L2+L3-L1).

Page 23 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

3.4.2. Opening In general, breaking of capacitive currents represents no problem for modern circuit breakers. If the RPH2 is used for the synchronized switching of capacitor banks, then the same applies as in 3.3.2, i.e. contact separation in sufficient time before voltage zero crossing.

3.4.3. Data on circuit breaker required The following data on the circuit breaker are absolutely necessary to operate the RPH2: The mechanical closing and/or opening operating time of the three poles (see 3.1.2 for definition). Accuracy about ±0,1 ms. In order to achieve the necessary accuracy when closing in the voltage zero crossing, the rate of fall of the withstand voltage (dUd/dt) of the breaker should be greater than the rate of change of the gap voltage at voltage zero (dU/dt). Figure 3 shows three possible cases.

1

The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is less than the rate of fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt < dU/dt, k 0.8*dU/dt. In this case please contact the manufacturer of the breaker for calculation of the pre-arcing times.

2

The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is equal to the rate of fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt = dU/dt, k=1.

3

The rate of fall of the breakers withstand voltage (dUd/dt) is greater than the rate of fall of the system voltage (dU/dt). dUd/dt > dU/dt, k>1.

Figure 3

1

u

2

3

t 1 interrupter dielectric strength lower than dU/dt of system voltage 2 interrupter dielectric strength equal dU/dt of system voltage 3 interrupter dielectric strength greater than dU/dt of system voltage

Page 24 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

However, some pre-arcing may be inevitable due to variations in the closing time and the spread in dielectric withstand. To minimise energizing transients, the closing should aim at an instant, td, after the voltage zero (the RPH2 takes this into account through a given arcing time). If data is not available from the breaker manufacturer, the pre-arcing time can be approximated. Modern breakers have closing contact speeds of typical 5 m/s and a dielectric strength of more than 20 kV/mm. That results in a fall rate (dUd/dt) of more than 100 kV/ms. Figure 4 shows the voltage across the open contact gap and the withstand voltage fall with varying closing times. The arcing time ta is calculated so that the withstand voltage is approx. the same value as the upper and lower operating time tolerance. Figure 4 Ud u

Up ta T

T

t

T1 voltage across the open contact gap and withstand voltage fall with varying closing time T 1±ΔT

The RPH2 arcing time setting can be calculated according to the following formulas. Take note of the differing arcing times with isolated neutrals. The calculations must be verified by switching tests.

Page 25 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Note: The system voltage in the following formulas is related to one interrupting chamber of the circuit breaker, take care in case of breakers with multiple interrupting chambers! The voltage across one interrupting chamber is calculated as follows where "m" is the number of interrupting chambers of one pole:

1.05 m-1 Un = U system ⋅ m Un [kV]

Un... Voltage for one interrupting chamber

system voltage (rms) for one interrupting chamber

2 [kV] 3 2 u'= Un ⋅ [kV] 2 u'= Un ⋅

peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles peak value, neutral isolated, for the two first poles L2 and L3

u'=1.5⋅ Un ⋅

2 [kV] 3

peak value, neutral isolated, for the last pole L1

dU 1 [kV/ ms] = u'⋅ω ⋅ dt 1000 dUd [kV/ ms] dt ⎛ dUd ⎞ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ dt ⎠ = k [p.u.] ⎛ dU⎞ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ dt ⎠ Δ T [ms] ΔT ) sin(ω ⋅ 1000 ⋅1000 [ms] ta = ω⋅k ΔT ) ⋅ u [kV] Up = sin(ω ⋅ 1000

rateof fall of system voltage rate of fall of CB withstand voltage

see figure 3

variation of CB closing time prearcing time set to RPH2 prearcing voltage

The following example demonstrates the calculation for the pre-arcing time for each pole with various system neutral treatments.

Page 26 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Example: Un = 145 [kV] u' = 118.4 [kV] u' = 102.5 [kV]

system voltage (rms) peak value, neutral grounded, for all poles peak value, neutral isolated, for the two first poles L2 and L3

u' = 177.6 [kV] dU = 37.2 [kV / ms] dt dU = 32.2 [kV / ms] dt

peak value, neutral isolated, for the last pole L1 rate of fall of system voltage, neutral grounded rate of fall of system voltage, neutral isolated (for the two first poles L2 and L3)

dU = 558 . [kV / ms] dt

rate of fall of system voltage, neutral isolated (for the last pole L1)

dUd = 100 [kV / ms] dt k = 2.7 [p. u.] k = 3.1 [p. u.] k = 1.8 [p. u.] ΔT = ±1 [ms] ta = 0.4 [ms] ta = 0.3 [ms] ta = 0.5 [ms]

rate of fall of CB withstand voltage neutral grounded, for L1, L2, L3 neutral isolated, for L2, L3 neutral isolated, for L1 variation of CB closing time neutral grounded, prearcing time set to RPH2 for all poles neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2 for poles L2 and L3 neutral isolated, prearcing time set to RPH2 for pole L1

3.4.4 Necessary Switching Time Accuracy Capacitor energizing places the greatest demands on the breaker in reference to operating time constancy. Every variation from the required switching time leads to a higher withstand voltage value which causes greater surges and inrush currents. Closing time variation should amount to ± 1 ms at the most. When this accuracy cannot be maintained under all conditions, we recommend the use of the analogue module option A to correct the operating time influences. For closing, the switch should reach a operating time accuracy of ± 1,5 ms.

Page 27 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

3.5

Switching (closing) of uncharged Lines Uncharged high voltage lines are to be fundamentally treated like capacitors. Due to the inter-phase coupling the switching moments are not the same as for capacitor banks. The RPH2 can also be used for auto-reclosing of uncompensated lines equipped with inductive potential transformers. During the auto-reclose dead-time the trapped charges on the line must be fully discharged by the inductive potential transformers! Whether the system neutral is earthed or isolated does not effect the switching moments. The RPH2 must be set to the [User Program] with the following settings (see also 5.1.5.1). For [T_C1 Neutral isolated] and for [T_C1 Neutral grounded] the same values must be set: 50 Hz: L1 = 0 ms L2 = 7.3 ms L3 = 13.3 ms 60 Hz: L1 = 0 ms L2 = 6.1 ms L3 = 11.1 ms

Page 28 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

4

FUNCTIONS OF THE ADDITIONAL MODULES

4.1

Signal Module: Option S

4.1.1 Alarm outputs The module offers additional outlets (alarm 2 to 7). Each alarm contact corresponds with the associated indicator-LED (LED 2 to 7) at the front. The allocation of the alarm functions to the output contacts is user-defined. Many alarm functions can be laid to one output. The procedure is described in chapter 5.

4.1.2 Opto coupler inputs Opto coupler inputs with pre-defined functions are available. 4.1.2.1 Measuring the operating time Three inputs serve to measure the operating time of the three poles via their auxiliary contacts. (Resolution 0,5 ms). The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts signalling (contact 52a) works with an internal RPH2 voltage (48 VDC), i.e. potential-free contacts are necessary. The necessary wiring is to be carried out according to the accompanying wiring diagram. Figure 5 CB main contact

closing

CB aux. contact

-Δt

CB main contact

opening

CB aux. contact

Δt time

To compensate the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts of the breaker poles, the possibility exists to feed in a compensation time in order to maintain the operating time as real value on the display and in the archives. Figure 5 shows the correlation as an example. If the auxiliary contact closes after the main contact then the compensation time value. Δt is negative, if the auxiliary contact opens before the main contact then a positive value results. If no possibility exists to measure the time shift of the auxiliary contacts, this value can also be determined via the RPH2 within the time release limits. Conditions: • The pole operating times given by the manufacturer are correctly fed in (see 5.1 and 5.2)

Page 29 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

• The environmental conditions correspond approx. to the conditions when measuring the pole operating times in the factory. With strong deviations in the environmental conditions, the pole operating times must be measured again on site. • The RPH2 compensating function is deactivated (see 5.6). • The circuit breaker can be operated repeatedly without load (with opened busbar disconnector. Operate the circuit breaker via the RPH2 with channel 1. Change to the menu [Measurement] / [Measured Times]. In the menu [Measured Op. Times] (Figure 6) the measured pole operating times appear in the status line, including the main contact/auxiliary contact time shift. Figure 6 Me a s u r C o mm a CB S i Ca l c u > Me a s u 146 . 5

d n g l r 1

L1

T i me s OU T a l Re c t e d Op d Op . T 5 . 6 14 12345 L2 L

d n a e 4

Pole operating times: e i v ed . T i me s i me 6 . 1ms 678 3

L1 = 139.3 ms L2 = 138.7 ms L3 = 139.6 ms

The value for "H-contact SK1 Diff" for every pole is calculated with:

[Aux. Timeshift CH1] = [Pole operating time] - [Measured Op. Time] The input values in figure 7 are calculated with the values form figure 6 and .the values of the pole operating times. Figure 7 CB A A > A A -

r r u u 7

Da c i c i x . x . . 2

t n n T T

a g T g T i me i me - 6

L1

- > i me CH 1 i me CH 2 s h i f t CH 1 s h i f t CH 2 . 9 - 6 . 5ms 12345678 L2 L3

Because the operating times are measured with a resolution of 0,5 ms, it is possibly necessary to constitute the average value from several switching operations. Feed in the determined values under [CB Data] / [Aux. Timeshift CH1] (figure 7) and check the measured operating times as described above. A further compensation is possibly necessary.

Page 30 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Check in all cases that the measured operating time corresponds with actual operating times of the circuit breaker. This is essential for using the function of the adaptive control ! For devices with two switching functions (RPH2-2), repeat the procedure for the second switching channel too. 4.1.2.2 Remote reset An input for remote reset is available. A potential-free contact (closer) is necessary as control device. Drive takes place with the RPH2 intern 48 VDC voltage. 4.1.2.3 Real time clock synchronization A further input is for synchronizing with a radio clock. It can be parallel switched with other synchronized control devices. A potential-free contact is necessary.

4.2

Analogue Module: Option A With this module the influence of environmental parameters on the pole operating time can be compensated. External sensors are necessary for pressure and temperature measurement. Control voltage, pressure and temperature are continually measured. The voltage and pressure values are immediately available for the calculation of compensation times. The shown vales in the menus [Measured value/Control voltage] and [Measured value/Pressure] are the basic calculating factors. An average value formation is carried out for temperature compensation. Update takes place every two hours. The stored temperature value is compared with the measured value and the stored temperature is compensated by half the difference (figure 8). In the menu [Measured value/Temperature] the actual measured temperature is shown, in the menu [Measured value/Temperature f. Comp.] the average is shown which is effective for compensation. Figure 8

ambient temperature

temperature for compensation

Page 31 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

In the menu [Measured value/Compensation] each of the actual additional times are shown. After the key-operated switch is turned form "OFF" to "OPERATION", the RPH2 carries out an automatic check and all analogue measured values for compensation are set at the actual measured value.

4.2.1 Control Voltage Compensation Measuring the control voltage is done internally in the RPH2 and no additional equipment is necessary. The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according to a function with an open parameter. By fixing these parameters the compensation function can be suited to the character of the power switch. Calculation for opening and closing takes place separately. The parameter kU1 works for switching channel 1, kU2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2 switching functions). If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no additional times are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked. Fixing the compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the assistance of the accompanying PC Software. Two breaker characteristic measured points are required to calculate the compensation function: • One point with nominal conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of one pole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is the manufacturer value for pole operating time. • A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time of the same pole with rated pressure, rated temperature and reduced control voltage. Figure 9 shows an example of a circuit breaker opening: Value 1 (with nominal conditions): U1 = 220 VDC t1 = 27.0 ms Value 2: U2 = 180 VDC t2 = 29.2 ms

Rated control voltage Pole operating time with nominal conditions Reduced control voltage Pole operating time with control voltage U2

Figure 9 32 Function calculated by RPH2 31

Operating Time [ms]

30

Value 2 (U2/t2)

29 28 27

Value 1 (U1/t1)

26 140

160

180

200

Operating Voltage [V]

Page 32 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

220

240

The compensation parameter kU can be calculated using the following formula:

Value 1: U1 [V] rated control voltage t1 [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions Value 2: U2 [V] reduced control voltage t2 [ms] CB operating time with U2

kU =

(t2 - t1) ⋅ 100 drive mechanism parameter U1 ( − 1) ⋅ t1 U2

The input from above results in a compensation parameter kU = 36.6 With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kU1 and kU2 is to be carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

4.2.2 Temperature Compensation An external sensor with integrated transducer (2 conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) is necessary for measuring the temperature. The transducer supply is effected through the RPH2. Up to eight RPH2's can be parallel switched to one temperature transducer. See the connection plan 58.010.111xx also. The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according to a piecewise linear function with one control point every 10 °C in the range of -50 °C and +50 °C. So all kinds of temperature functions of the circuit breaker (from linear to exponential) can be set to the RPH2. The measured values can be entered in the table in figure 10. The line Delta_t = 0 ms defines the nominal operating time of the circuit breaker under normal conditions. The values of Delta_t at different ambient temperatures are the differences of the measured operating times to the nominal operating time. The 11 values of Delta_t(T) (T = -50 °C to +50 °C) must be set to the RPH2. In the example in figure 11 the procedure is shown. The measured values are marked by squares. Connect the points by lines end eventually extend the lines to the extremes (dotted line in the example). Evaluate the values of Delta_t(T) at the control points (50 °C to +50 °C) so to get the 11 values for Delta_t(T) shown in the table in figure 11. By using the PC software "RPH2- Tool" also an exponential function with one open parameter can be calculated. Especially for circuit breakers with spring drive mechanism this option will be useful.

Page 33 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Figure 10

Delta_t [ms]

Ambint Temperature [°C]

Page 34 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Figure 11 Delta_t [ms]

Temperature -50 °C -40 °C -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C +10 °C +20 °C +30 °C +40 °C +50 °C

Delta_t 13.0 ms 9.0 ms 5.0 ms 2.5 ms 1.6 ms 0.8 ms 0.4 ms 0.0 ms -0.2 ms -0.4 ms -1.0 ms

measured values

Ambient Temperature [°C]

With RPH2's with two switching functions, the evaluation of Delta_t(T) has to be carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

4.2.3 Hydraulic Pressure Compensation There are two module models available for measuring pressure: • Option A1: for breakers with a mutual hydraulic system for all three poles • Option A3: for breakers with separate hydraulic systems for each pole One (Option A1) or three (Option A3) external sensors with integrated transducer (2 conductors, auxiliary voltage 24 VDC) and standard output signal (4 ... 20 mA) are necessary for measuring hydraulic pressure. The transducer supply is effected through the RPH2.

Page 35 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

The RPH2 calculates the additional times for operating time compensation according to a function with one open parameter. By fixing this parameter, the compensation function can be suited to the character of the circuit breaker. Calculation for opening and closing takes place separately. The parameter kP1 works for switching channel 1, kP2 for switching channel 2 (only for devices with 2 switching functions). For the model with option A3 with pressure measuring per pole only a compensation parameter for each of the three poles is fed in. If a zero value is fed in for a parameter, then no additional times are calculated and the compensation function concerned is blocked. Fixing the compensation parameters takes place through calculation or with the assistance of the accompanying PC Software. Two measuring points of the switching characteristic analogue for 4.2.1 are required to calculate the equalising curve: • One point with rated conditions (value 1): measured pole operating time (of one pole) with rated voltage, rated pressure and rated temperature. In general that is the manufacturer value for pole operating time. • A second point with deviation conditions (value 2): measured pole operating time of the same pole with rated control voltage, rated temperature and reduced hydraulic pressure. Example: Value 1 (with nominal conditions): P1 = 265 bar t1 = 110.5 ms Value 2: P2 = 200 bar t2 = 127.7 ms

Rated pressure Pole operating time with nominal conditions Reduced pressure Pole operating time with pressure P2

The compensation parameters kP can be calculated using the following formula.

Value 1: P1 [V] rated hydraulic pressure t1 [ms] CB operating time at nominal conditions Value 2: P2 [V] reduced hydraulic pressure t2 [ms] CB operating time with P2

kP =

(t2 - t1) ⋅ 100 drive mechanism parameter P1 ( − 1) ⋅ t1 P2

The input from above results in a compensation parameter kP = 47.9. With RPH2's with two switching functions, the calculation for kP1 and kP2 is to be carried out separately for both switching channels and the values stored in the RPH2.

Page 36 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

4.2.4 Specifications for the external sensors For measuring pressure and temperature, external sensors with integrated transducer are necessary which are not part of the delivery. The integrated transducers must meet the following requirements: Auxiliary voltage 24 VDC (supplied by the RPH2) 2 conductor system Output signal 4 mA to 20 mA Such transducers can be obtained from many manufacturers. The measuring range of the sensors adjust itself to the respective requirements. However, unnecessarily large measuring ranges reduce the measuring accuracy of the RPH2. The RPH2 measuring input is adapted to the measuring range of the sensor through parameterisation. Transducer installation is carried out according to the manufacturer's guidelines. Likewise, the connection cables to the RPH2 must be selected according to the manufacturer's information. If no information is available, we recommend a shielded two-wire cable per transducer, or at least a twisted pair of wires.

4.2.5 Adaptive Control RPH2 with analogue module A and signal module S provide the additional feature of an adaptive control to compensate the long time drift in operating time of the CB drive. The actual operating times of the poles are measured by the signal module. A weighting factor in the range of 0 to 0.5, step 0.05 (0 = function is disabled) is used for controlling this function. A fraction (depending on the weighting factor) of the time difference between the operating time of the last operation and the operation before is added to the actual operating time. Additional operating times due to compensation functions are not taken into consideration, so the pure long time drift of the drive mechanism is compensated. The additional adaptive times are displayed and a function is available to reset these times. The compensation of the time shift between the main contacts and the auxiliary contacts of the breaker poles must be done very exactly to avoid errors in measuring of the actual operating times. • Time deviations of the measured values greater than 10 ms are not considered. (no operation of the CB or incorrect measurement of operating times). • Additional adaptive time is limited to 1 ms from one operation to the next. • If the operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away from the pre-set operating times for more than ±5 ms for opening ±10 ms for closing the alarm "Drive mech. Failure" is generated. The value of the weighting factor depends on the type of drive mechanism. We propose a value of 0.25 to 0.30 for all types of mechanism.

Page 37 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

4.3

Current Module Option I A current measuring module is available to make the switching of large transformers and reactors easy when putting the RPH2 Point-on-Wave Controller into operation. With this the inrush current can be recorded and graphically displayed during the switching process. Data for the last 4 switching operations are stored in a non-volatile memory and can be analysed on the display. Primary values are shown after feeding in the current transformer current ratio. For every phase there is an input for each 1 A and 5 A available. Because the current inputs have a short time withstand of 100 xln, current measurement can be carried out over a measuring core as well as a protection core of the current transformer.

Page 38 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5

RPH2 MENUE SYSTEM

5.1

System data >

- - RPH2 - 2 S I A 3 S y s t em Da t a CB Da t a Ana l o g Da t a A l a r ms

L1

L2

Enter

- -

12345678 L3

+

-

Esc

5.1.1 Password The factory-setting of the-password is "0000". To activate the password you must change to the submenu [System Data/Password]. The actual status (‘active’ or ‘off’) is shown in the bottom-left corner of the display. Type in the correct password and confirm the assumption by pressing the ‘Enter’-button (see chapter 2.5). The display shows ‘active’ and the green LED ‘ready’ starts blinking if the password is correct (see chapter 2.4.3.1). The password will be deactivated automatically if no button is pressed for more than 90 seconds.

>

Sy s Pa Sy Co Ra

L1

t s s n t

em Da t swo r d t em F r t r o l V ed P r e

a

eque o l t a s s u r 00 12345 L2 L

n g e 0 6 3

c y e 0 78

5.1.2 System Frequency After activating this function by pressing the ‘Enter’-button you can choose any item of the list by pressing the ‘+’- or the ‘-’-button (see chapter 2.5). Available items: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz

Page 39 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

S y s t em Da t Pa s swo r d > S y s t em F r Con t r o l V Ra t ed P r e 50 Hz 1 L1 L2

a equen c y o l t age s s u r e 2345678 L3

5.1.3 Control Voltage Type in the rated voltage of your CB-coil (available only for modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2xxA1, RPH2-xxA3). This value acts as base for the calculation of the additional compensation value of the mechanical operating time of the CB. Sy s Pa Sy > Co Ra

t s s n t

em Da t swo r d t em F r t r o l V ed P r e

a

eque o l t a s s u r 23 12345 L2 L

L1

n g e 0 6 3

c y e , 0 78

V

5.1.4 Rated Pressure Type in the value of the rated pressure of the hydraulic system of your CB-drive (available only for module RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3). This value acts as base for the calculation of the compensation value of the operating time of the CB. Sy s t Sy s Con > Ra t Sw i

em Da t t em F r t r o l V ed P r e t c h i ng

L1

a eque o l t a s s u r P r o

n g e g 1 123456 L2 L3

c y e r am 0ba r 78

5.1.5 Switching Program Select the suitable switching program by pressing the ‘+’- or ‘-’-button: • • • •

transformer shunt reactor capacitor bank user program

Page 40 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Sy s t Con Ra t > Sw i Lan T r an L1

em Da t t r o l V ed P r e t c h i ng guage s f o r me 1 L2

a o l t age s s u r e P r o g r am r 2345678 L3

5.1.5.1 User Program You can define your own switching moments for each phase by selecting the ‘User Program’. Note: If you select ‘user program’ you have to select the rated frequency first (see chapter 5.2). Adjustable switching moments: T_C1 Neutral isolated: Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with isolated neutral.

>

Us T T T T

e r P r o g r am _C1 Ne u t r . i _C1 Ne u t r . g _C2 Ne u t r . i _C2 Ne u t r . g 0 , 0 0 , 0 1234 L1 L2

s r s r

o o o o 0 56 L3

l u l u , 7

a t e nde a t e nde 0ms 8

d d d d

T_C1 Neutral grounded: Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 1 with grounded neutral. The following two submenus are available only for module RPH2-2xx (module with two switching channels):

T_C2 Neutral isolated: Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with isolated neutral. T_C2 Neutral grounded: Type in the switching moments of the three phases L1/L2/L3 for channel 2 with grounded neutral.

Page 41 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.1.6 Function Channel 1 For the module RPH2-1xxx you have to select whether if you use the RPH2 for closing or opening of the CB.

5.1.7 Language Select your preferred language. Available languages: • German • English • French • User language S y s t em Da Ra t ed P r Sw i t c h i n > Language T i me / Da t Eng l i s h L1

t a e s s u r e g P r o g r am e

12345678 L2 L3

Note: You can load the menutext in any language with the RPH-Tool (PC-based software). If there any problems with the loaded language file you can return to the English menus: Turn the key-operated switch to "OFF", press the "Quitt" button and meanwhile return the key-operated switch back to "OPERATION".

5.1.8 Time / Date Type in the actual date and time. The format for date and time is: ”YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM”. S y s t em Da t a Sw i t c h i n g Language > T i me / Da t e New Pa s swo 1996 - 12 - 06 12 L1 L2

P r o g r am

r d 17 : 51 345678 L3

Note: Type in only correct values for date and time. Note: There are no problems with a date after 2000-01-01.

5.1.9 New Password If you want to change the actual password simply type in the new password. Possible values are all numbers between ‘0000’ and ‘9999’.

Page 42 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

S y s t em Da t a Language T i me / Da t e > New Pa s swo r d Se l f t e s t S t a 0 1234 L1 L2

r 0 5 L

t 00 678 3

Note: If you have forgotten the selected password, you can ask for a temporary password (call your local ALSTOM Grid representative)

5.1.10 Selftest Start You can activate the selftest-facility by pressing the ‘Enter’-button. The selftest-facility checks the internal function of the module and the switching outputs. S y s t em Da t a T i me / Da t e New Pa s swo > Se l f t e s t S Se l f t e s t I YES 12 L1 L2

r d t a r t n t e r v a l 345678 L3

Note: You can activate the selftest with the key-operated-switch too (see chapter 2.4.2).

5.1.11 Selftest Interval Type in the desired interval between the automatic selftests. The possible range is from 0,0 hours (shortest interval is 0,1 hour = 6 minutes) to 500 hours. Choosing a value of 0,0 hours deactivates the automatic selftest-facility. S y s t em Da t a T i me / Da t e New Pa s swo r d Se l f t e s t S t a r > Se l f t e s t I n t e 2 12345 L1 L2 L

t r v a l 4 , 0 Hr 678 3

In the menu [Aux. Functions][Error Type] the type errors are displayed (see 5.6.3).

Page 43 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.2

CB Data

5.2.1 Operating Time CH1 Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and a temperature of 20 °C for switching channel 1. The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 200 ms. The switching function (closing or opening) for module RPH2-1xx depends on the selection made in the submenu ‘Function Channel 1’. (see chapter 5.1.6). Module RPH2-2xx uses channel 1 for closing of the CB.

>

CB D a Op e r Op e r A r c i A r c i 0 , 0 L1

t a a n n

a t i n g T i me CH 1 t i n g T i me CH 2 g T i me CH 1 g T i me CH 2 0 , 0 0 , 0ms 12345678 L2 L3

Note 1: The value of the operating time for each phase of the CB depends on the type and manufacturer of the CB. This value is part of the CB-documentation delivered with your CB. Note 2: The difference between 2 phases should be less than one period (20 ms for 50 Hz). Note 3: For single-phase-CBs the values for all three phases must be the same.

5.2.2 Operating Time CH2 Type in the operating time for each phase at the rated voltage, rated pressure and a temperature of 20 °C for switching channel 2. Channel 2 always is used for opening. The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 200 ms. This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx.

5.2.3 Arcing Time CH1 Type in the arcing time for each phase of the CB (see chapter 3.2 to 3.4). The permissible range is from 0,0 ms (minimum value is 0,1 ms) to 50 ms. Closing: Pre-arcing time of the CB. The closing of the main-contact happens after the chosen switching moment.

Page 44 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Opening: Arcing time of the CB. The opening of the main-contact happens before the zero-crossing of the current. CB D a Op e r Op e r > A r c i A r c i 0 , 0

t a a n n

L1

a t i n g T i me CH 1 t i n g T i me CH 2 g T i me CH 1 g T i me CH 2 0 , 0 0 , 0ms 12345678 L2 L3

5.2.4 Arcing Time CH2 This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 except that channel 2 always is used for opening.

5.2.5 Auxiliary Timeshift CH1 This value is used for compensating the time lag between the main-contact and the auxiliary-contact of the CB (see chapter 4.1.2.1). The permissible range is from -25,5 ms to +25,5 ms. CB A A > A A +

r r u u 0

Da c i c i x . x . , 0

t n n T T

L1

a g T g T i me i me +0

i me CH 1 i me CH 2 s h i f t CH 1 s h i f t CH 2 , 0 + 0 , 0ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxS.

5.2.6 Auxiliary Timeshift CH2 This submenu is available only for module RPH2-2xxx. It works as for channel 1 except that channel 2 always is used for opening.

5.2.7 Adaptive Control This menu opens a submenu for controlling the this function (see also 4.2.5) CB D a Au x . > Adap Comp kU1

L1

t T t e V

a i me s h i v Co n s a t i o l t ag

L2

i f t CH 2 n t r o l - > on e CH 1

12345678 L3

Page 45 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

This submenu and the following menus are available only with module RPH2-xSAx. 5.2.7.1 Weighting Factor This factor defines the friction of time difference added to the operating time.

>

A d W A A R

a e d d e

p i a a s

t g p p e

i h t t t

v Co t i ng i ve i ve Ada

L 1

n t r o Fa c T i me T i me p t i v 0 12345 L2 L

l t o r s CH 1 s CH 2 e T i me . 25 678 3

The permissible range is from 0.00 to 0.50 (step 0.05). A value of 0.00 disables this function. 5.2.7.2 Adaptive Times CH1 Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 1 are displayed. 5.2.7.3 Adaptive Times CH2 Here the adaptive times for each pole related to switching channel 2 are displayed. 5.2.7.4 Reset Adaptive Times This function allows to reset the additional times due to adaptive control to zero. After this, the RPH2 operates with the pre-set pole operating times.

5.2.8 Compensation If you select ‘NO’ all compensation functions are blocked. If you select ‘YES’ compensation is active (for description see chapter 4.2) CB D a Au x . Au x . > Comp kU1 YES

t T T e V

a i me i me n s a o l t

L1

L2

s s t a

h h i g

i f t CH 1 i f t CH 2 on e CH 1

12345678 L3

5.2.9 kU1 Voltage CH1 Type in the calculated value for compensation of changes of the control voltage (see chapter 4.2.1). The permissible range is from 0,0 to 150,0.

Page 46 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

CB D a Au x . Comp > kU1 kP1

t T e V P

a i me n s a o l t r e s

i f t CH 2 on e CH 1 r e CH 1 30 , 3 12345678 L2 L3

L1

s t a s

h i g u

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.10 kP1 Pressure CH1 same as 5.2.9, but for pressure compensation for channel 1. This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.11 Temperature Compensation CH1 This submenu enables or disables the temperature compensation. CB D a t a k U 1 V o l t a g e CH 1 k P 1 P r e s u r e CH 1 > T emp . C omp . CH 1 T a b l e T emp . CH 1 ON 12345678 L1 L2 L3

- >

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.12 Table Temp. CH1 This menu opens a submenu for setting the values for temperature compensation. 5.2.12.1 Delta_t xx°C Here the 11 values of Delta_t(T) for defining the temperature compensation function can be entered to the RPH2 (see also 4.2.2). Tab De > De De De

L1

l l l l l

e t t t t

a a a a

T _ _ _ _

emp t t t t

. -

CH 1 50 °C 40 °C 30 °C 20 °C +5 . 3 12345678 L2 L3

- >

ms

The permissible range for Delta_t is from -10.0 ms to +25.0 ms.

Page 47 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.2.13 kU2 Voltage CH2 same as 5.2.9, but for control voltage compensation for channel 2. This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.14 kP2 Pressure CH2 same as 5.2.10, but for temperature compensation for channel 2. This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.15 Temperature Compensation CH2 same as 5.2.11, but for temperature compensation for channel 2. This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.2.16 Table Temp. CH1 same as 5.2.12, but for temperature compensation for channel 2. 5.2.16.1 Delta_t xx°C same as 5.2.12.1, but for temperature compensation for channel 2.

5.3

Analogue Data

5.3.1 Thresholds The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH 2 obtained. Exceeding of limit-settings cause an alarm, if set (see chapter 5.4).

>

Ana l og Da t a T r e s ho l ds - > CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r i m CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c Ac t ua l Con t r . Vo l t age

L1

L2

12345678 L3

5.3.1.1 Current max. Type in the allowed maximum value (peak-value) of the current during the switching operation. If the current during a switching operation exceeds this limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from 0 A to 9999 A.

Page 48 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

>

T r e s h Cu r r Op . Op . T emp

o e V V e

l n o o r

L1

d t l l a

s ma t ag t ag t u r

x e e e

( p ma m i ma 50 123456 L2 L3

- > ea k ) x n x 0 A 78

This submenu is only available for module RPH2-xxI. 5.3.1.2 Control Voltage max. Type in the upper limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the control voltage becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V. T r e s h Cu r r > Con t Con t T emp

o e r r e

l n o o r

L1

d s t ma x ( p l Vo l t ag l Vo l t ag a t u r e ma 242 123456 L2 L3

- > ea k ) e ma x e m i n x , 0 V 78

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.3.1.3 Control Voltage min. Type in the lower limit for the control voltage. If the measured value of the control voltage becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V. T r e s h Cu r r Op . > Op . T emp

L1

o e V V e

l n o o r

d t l l a

s ma t ag t ag t u r

x e e e

( p ma m i ma 200 123456 L2 L3

- > ea k ) x n x , 0 V 78

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.3.1.4 Temperature max. Type in the upper limit for the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value of the temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from -100° C to +100° C.

Page 49 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

T r e s h Op . Op . > T emp T emp

o V V e e

l o o r r

L1

d l l a a

s t t t t

a a u u

g g r r

e ma e m i e ma e m i +50 , 123456 L2 L3

- > x n x n 0 C 78

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.3.1.5 Temperature min. Type in the lower limit of the ambient temperature of the CB. If the measured value of the temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from -100° C to +100° C. T r e s h Op . T emp > T emp P r e s

o V e e s

l o r r u

L1

d l a a r

s t age m i t u r e ma t u r e m i e ma x - 50 . 123456 L2 L3

- > n x n 0 C 78

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.3.1.6 Pressure max. Type in the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of the temperature becomes higher than the limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar. T r T T > P P

e s h emp emp r e s r e s

o e e s s

l r r u u

L1

d a a r r

s t u r e ma t u r e m i e ma x e m i n 35 123456 L2 L3

- > x n

0ba r 78

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.3.1.7 Pressure min. Type in the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure of the CB. If the measured value of the temperature becomes lower than the limit an alarm is generated. The permissible range is from 0 bar to 1000 bar.

Page 50 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

T r T T P > P

e s h emp emp r e s r e s

L1

o e e s s

l r r u u

d a a r r

s t u r e ma t u r e m i e ma x e m i n 18 123456 L2 L3

- > x n

0ba r 78

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.3.2 CT Rated Current prim Type in the rated primary current of your current transducer. The permissible range is from 0 A to 5000 A. Ana l og Da t a T r e s ho l ds > CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s Ac t ua l Con t r . Vo l 50 1234567 L1 L2 L3

- > r i m e c t age 0 A 8

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

5.3.3 CT Rated Current sec Type in the rated secondary current of your current transducer. Permissible values are 1 A and 5 A. Ana l og Da t a T r e s ho l ds - > CT Ra t e d Cu r r . p r i m > CT Ra t e d Cu r r . s e c Ac t ua l Con t r . Vo l t age 5 A 12345678 L1 L2 L3

This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI. Note: The current transformer has to be connected to the correct terminal of the RPH2 (1 A or 5 A, see wiring diagram).

Page 51 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.3.4 Actual Control Voltage Type in the measured value of the actual control voltage. This input calibrates the internal voltage measurement. This value acts as base for the calculation of compensation of the switching moment. The permissible range is from 35 V to 300 V. Ana l og CT Ra CT Ra > Ac t ua T emp e

t t l r

L1

Da t a ed Cu r ed Cu r Con t r . a t u r e 1 1234 L2

r . p r i m r . s e c Vo l t age - > 12 , 2 V 5678 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. Determine the correct value: Measure the actual value of the control voltage on terminal -X6:10 and -X6:11 with an calibrated voltmeter and type in this value. Type in the determined value. Note:This input calibrates the voltage measurement function. The correct input of this value is absolutely necessary. You cannot calibrate the RPH2 with the PC-software ‘RPH-Tool’. In the Normal-Mode (Ready-LED is steady-light) the measured voltage is displayed. After calibrating the voltage measurement check the correct function by monitoring the display.

5.3.5 Temperature The following submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. In this submenu the temperature transducer is calibrated. Ana l og CT Ra Ac t ua > T emp e P r e s s

Da t a t ed Cu r r . s e c l Con t r . Vo l t age r a t u r e - > u r e - >

L1

L2

12345678 L3

5.3.5.1 Value at 4 mA Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 4 mA. This information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer.

Page 52 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

>

T emp e r a t u r e V a l u e a t 4 mA V a l u e a t 2 0 mA

L1

- >

- 40 , 0 C 12345678 L2 L3

5.3.5.2 Value at 20 mA Type in the rated value of the temperature transducer at an output current of 20 mA. This information is part of the documentation of the temperature transducer. T emp e r a t u r e V a l u e a t 4 mA > V a l u e a t 2 0 mA

L1

- >

+100 , 0 C 12345678 L2 L3

5.3.6 Pressure These submenus are available only with modules RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. In the following submenus the pressure transducer can be calibrated. Ana l og CT Ra Ac t ua T emp e > P r e s s

L1

Da t a t ed Cu r r . s e c l Con t r . Vo l t age r a t u r e - > u r e - > 12345678 L2 L3

5.3.6.1 Value at 4 mA Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 4 mA. This information is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer.

>

P r e s s u r e Va l ue a t Va l ue a t

L1

- > 4 mA 2 0 mA

0ba r 12345678 L2 L3

Page 53 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.3.6.2 Value at 20 mA Type in the rated value of the pressure transducer at an output current of 20 mA. This information is part of the documentation of the pressure transducer. P r e s s u r e Va l ue a t > Va l ue a t

500ba r 12345678 L2 L3

L1

5.4

- > 4 mA 2 0 mA

Alarms

5.4.1 Reset Obligatory In this submenu you can select which alarm outputs (and the according LED on the front panel of the RPH2) are to be acknowledged. Alarm-outputs which are marked as reset obligatory are displayed on the front panel and activated (closed) until you press the ‘Quitt’-button, regardless whether the alarm is still active or already gone. Example:

>

A l a Re Lo A l

rms s e t ob l i ga t o r y c k - ou t a rm L i s t

L1

10100000 12345678 L2 L3

- >

In the example mentioned above the alarms 1 and 3 are marked with the function "Reset obligatory" (must be acknowledged). Reset Obligatory (Setting ”1”): Alarm is active -> Alarm is acknowledged -> Alarm off -> respectively: Alarm is active -> Alarm off -> Alarm is acknowledged ->

LED is blinking, alarm-output active LED has steady-light, alarm-output active LED off, alarm-output not active LED is blinking, alarm-output active LED is blinking, alarm-output active LED off, alarm-output not active

Alarm is not reset obligatory (Setting ”0”): Alarm is active -> LED has steady-light, alarm-output active Alarm off -> LED off, alarm-output not active

Page 54 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Note: With the function "reset obligatory" you can change an alarm-message from the type pulse type to a steady alarm type (see 5.4.3).

5.4.2 Lock-Out Here you can mark each of the 7 alarm outputs to produce a blocking of the device in case of the corresponding alarm occurs. That means: No switching operation is possible, the green LED is dark and the contact "Device not ready" (-X6:12/13) is closed. Some actions or alarms cause a lock out in any case ,also without activating the responding alarm (LED dark, contact -X6:12-13 is closed): • Keyswitch is "OFF" • Relay starting up • Reference voltage is missing • Frequency not in permitted range • Neutral earthing switch in intermediate position Example: A l a Re > Lo A l

rms s e t ob l i ga t o r y c k - ou t a rm L i s t

L1

00100000 12345678 L2 L3

- >

In the example mentioned above the activating of alarm 3 blocks the RPH2. No operation is possible, until the "Quit" button is pressed. The output contact "Device not ready" (-X6:12/13) is closed.

5.4.3 Alarm List The following submenus are depending on the configuration of the RPH2. Each internal alarm (message) can be assigned to up to 7 alarm-outputs. The assignment is made through the setting of a ‘1’ at the corresponding display-unit. Example: A l a F r F r > Cu *Re

L1

rm equ equ r r e f . V

L e e n o

i n n t l

s t c y m i c y ma ma x ( t age 0010 1234 L2

- > n x p F 0 5 L

e a 1 6 3

a i 0 7

k ) l u r e 0 8

Page 55 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

In the example mentioned above the alarm-message ‘Current max. (peak)’ is assigned to alarm-output 3 and alarm-output 6. The asterisk (‘*’) at the position ‘Ref. Voltage Failure’ in the picture above indicates that the fault ‘Ref. Voltage Failure’ is pending, that means the reference voltage is missing. Pulse-alarm: If an alarm-message is a pulse, this alarm-message is active only for a period of 0,5 seconds. If this alarm-message is assigned to an alarm-output which is marked as ‘reset obligatory’, the alarm-output remains active until this alarm is acknowledged. Note: The assignment of an alarm-message to the alarm-output number 8 has no effect. 5.4.3.1 Lock-out This is only a summary alarm. It is generated by other alarms which cause a blocking of the relay. It is active when the device is blocked (see 5.4.2). The alarm itself causes no blocking of the device! 5.4.3.2 Frequency min The reference voltage (phase L1) is monitored permanently. If the lower limit of the frequency is reached, an alarm-message ‘Frequency min.’ is generated. Limits: Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 16 2/3 Hz

Lower Limit 45 Hz 54 Hz 15 Hz

Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only if the reference voltage is connected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm ‘Frequency min.’ is generated. 5.4.3.3 Frequency max. The reference voltage is monitored permanently on phase L1. If the upper limit of the frequency is reached, an alarm-message ‘Frequency max.’ is generated. Limits: Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 16 2/3 Hz

Upper Limit 55 Hz 66 Hz 18,26 Hz

Note: The monitoring of the frequency is active only, if the reference voltage is connected to the device. If the reference voltage is missing, no alarm ‘Frequency min.’ is generated.

Page 56 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.4.3.4 Current max. (peak) This alarm-message is generated if the setting of the current maximum (peak value) is reached or exceeded during a switching operation in one or more phases (thresholds see 5.3.1.1) The peak-value of the current is monitored, not the RMS-value. This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxI. 5.4.3.5 Reference Voltage Failure This alarm-message is generated if the reference voltage is missing for more than 2 seconds. Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2). 5.4.3.6 RTC Impulse Failure This alarm-message is generated if the minute-pulse is missing. 5.4.3.7 Neutral intermediate This alarm-message is generated if the position of the ‘Neutral-switch’ is not defined. Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2). 5.4.3.8 Neutral grounded This message indicates, that the ‘Neutral-switch’ is in position ‘grounded’. If the position ‘grounded’ is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set ‘Neutral grounded’. Note: This message is not an alarm-message but may be helpful for supervising 5.4.3.9 Neutral isolated This message indicates, that the ‘Neutral-switch’ is in position ‘isolated’. If the position ‘isolated’ is indicated, the RPH2 uses the parameter-set ‘Neutral isolated’ (see 5.4.3.8). 5.4.3.10 Selftest ERROR This alarm-message is generated when the automatic selftest discovers an internal error (output circuit is not working correct). This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). Note: This alarm-message blocks the RPH2 in any case, regardless whether the alarm is set for blocking or not (see chapter 5.4.2). 5.4.3.11 Selftest CH1 ERROR This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 1.

Page 57 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). 5.4.3.12 Selftest CH2 ERROR This alarm-message is the detailed message from 5.4.3.10 related to channel 2. This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx. 5.4.3.13 Command Time CH1 min This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 1 (the function of channel 1 is depending on configuration of the RPH2 and the ‘Function Channel 1’ chapter 5.1.6) is to short, i. e. perhaps not all three phase are switched within this time. The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms. This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). 5.4.3.14 Command Time CH2 min This alarm-message is generated when the command time for channel 2 (opening) is to short. The alarm is generated if the duration of the command impulse is less than 100 ms. This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-2xx . 5.4.3.15 Operating Time min This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than 2 ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is shorter). This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS. 5.4.3.16 Operating Time max. This alarm-message is generated when the measured operating time differs more than 2 ms of the calculated operation time (measured time is longer). This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS.

Page 58 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.4.3.17 Drive mech. Failure This alarm-message is generated when: • The monitoring of the CB-position is undefined. • The operating time corrected by adaptive control has drifted away for more than 5 ms for opening and 10 ms for closing from the pre-set operating times (only with adaptive control, see 4.2.5). This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxS. 5.4.3.18 Archive Full This alarm-message indicates that the archive is nearly full. This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). Note: The archive is capable to store 1000 switching operations. When the 900th switching operation is stored in the archive the alarm-message is generated. Each switching operation following generates an alarm-message until the archive is read by the PC-Software RPH-Tool, 5.4.3.19 Archive Failure This alarm-message is generated, when storing data into the archive fails. This alarm-message is a pulse (see chapter 5.4.3. Pulse-alarm). 5.4.3.20 Control Voltage min This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the control voltage is reached (see chapter 5.3.1.3 ‘Control Voltage min.). This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.4.3.21 Control Voltage max. This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the control voltage is reached (see chapter 5.3.1.2 ‘Control Voltage max.). This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3. 5.4.3.22 Temperature min This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the ambient temperature is reached (see chapter 5.3.1.5 ‘Temperature min.). This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

Page 59 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.4.3.23 Temperature max. This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the ambient temperature is reached (see chapter 5.3.1.4 ‘Temperature max.). This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2xxA3. 5.4.3.24 Temp. Transducer Fault This alarm-message indicates an error of the temperature transducer (cable or sensor), i. e. the temperature measurement is not working. This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2xxA3. 5.4.3.25 Pressure min This alarm-message indicates that the lower limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached (see chapter 5.3.1.7 ‘Pressure min.). This alarm-message is available only for module RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3. 5.4.3.26 Pressure max. This alarm-message indicates that the upper limit of the hydraulic pressure is reached (see chapter 5.3.1.6 ‘Pressure max.). This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3. 5.4.3.27 Press. Transducer Fault This alarm-message indicates an error of the pressure transducer (cable or sensor), i. e. the pressure measurement is not working. This alarm-message is available only with modules RPH2-xxA1 or RPH2-xxA3.

5.5

Measurement

5.5.1 Current Graphs In this submenu you can display the current curves of the last 4 switching operations for each phase (L1, L2, L3), as well as the maximum currents (peak value).

>

Me a Cu Me F r Cu YES

s r a e r

u r s q r

r e u u e

eme n t n t Gr aph s r e d T i me s en c y n t ( RMS )

L1

Page 60 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

L2

12345678 L3

- > - >

Pressing the ‘Enter’-button activates the Graph-mode. Repeatedly pressing the ‘Enter’button allows to go through the last 4 switching operations. Pressing the ‘+’- or ‘-’-button changes from phase L1 to phase L2 to phase L3 to the peak values of the current of each phase. When a graph is displayed, the amplification factor of the graph can be changed. Pressing the [Quitt] and [+] button at the same time increases the amplification, [Quitt] and [-] button decreases the amplification. This submenu is available only for module RPH2-xxI.

5.5.2 Measured Times The measured times of the last switching operation are displayed in this submenu. The values available are depending on the configuration of the RPH2. Me a Cu > Me F r Cu

s r a e r

u r s q r

r e u u e

eme n t n t Gr aph s r e d T i me s en c y n t ( RMS )

L1

L2

- > - >

12345678 L3

5.5.2.1 Command OUT This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage (phase L1) until the command is executed.

>

Me a s u r C o mm a CB S i Ca l c u Me a s u 4 . 5

e n g l r

L1

d T i me s d OU T na l r e c a t e d Op e d Op . 9 . 5 12345 L2 L

- > e . T 9 6 3

i v ed T i me i me . 5ms 78

Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms. 5.5.2.2 CB Signal received This submenu shows the measured time from the zero-crossing of the reference voltage (phase L1) until the auxiliary-contacts of the CB are switched. Me a s u r C o mm a > CB S i Ca l c u Me a s u 123 . 3 L1

e n g l r 1

d d n a e 2

T i me s OU T a l r e c t e d Op d Op . 4 . 1 12 12345 L2 L

- > e . T 3 6 3

i v ed T i me i me . 7ms 78

Page 61 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS. Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0,5 ms. 5.5.2.3 Calculated Operating Time This submenu shows the calculated operating time according to the measured service conditions (temperature, pressure, control voltage). If the compensation facility is not active, the set values of "Operating Time CH1" (see 5.2.1).and "Operating Time CH2" (see 5.2.2) are displayed. Me a s u r C o mm a CB S i > Ca l c u Me a s u 128 . 7

e n g l r 1

L1

d d n a e 2

T i me s OU T a l r e c t e d Op d Op . 9 . 0 12 12345 L2 L

- > e . T 9 6 3

i v ed T i me i me . 0ms 78

5.5.2.4 Measured Operating Time This submenu shows the measured operating times, assuming that the values for "Aux. Timeshift CH1/CH2" (see 5.2.5, 5.2.6 and 4.1.2.1) have been determined correctly. Me a s u r C o mm a CB S i Ca l c u > Me a s u 128 . 9

e n g l r 1

L1

d d n a e 2

T i me s OU T a l r e c t e d Op d Op . 9 . 3 12 12345 L2 L

- > e . T 8 6 3

i v ed T i me i me . 9ms 78

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxS. Note: The resolution of the time measurement is 0.5 ms.

5.5.3 Frequency This submenu shows the actual frequency of the reference voltage. The resolution of the frequency measurement is 0,05 Hz. Me a Cu Me > F r Cu

L1

s r a e r

u r s q r

r e u u e

eme n t n t Gr aph r e d T i me en c y n t ( RMS ) 50 12345 L2 L

Page 62 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

s s

- > - >

, 00Hz 678 3

The switching moments (switching programs) are permanently corrected according to the measured frequency. Note: The measurement of the frequency works only when the reference voltage is connected. If the reference voltage is missing the rated frequency is displayed instead.

5.5.4 Current (RMS) This submenu shows the actual measured line current per phase. Me a Me F r > Cu Co

s a e r n

u s q r t 0

r u u e r

L1

eme n t r e d T i me en c y n t ( RMS ) o l Vo l t a 0 12345 L2 L

s

- >

ge 0 678 3

A

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxI.

5.5.5 Control Voltage This submenu shows the actual measured control voltage. Me a F r Cu > Co Ac

L1

s e r n t

u q r t u

r u e r a

eme n t en c y n t ( RMS ) o l Vo l t ag l T emp e r a 61 123456 L2 L3

e t u r e , 2 V 78

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.5.6 Actual Temperature This submenu shows the actual measured ambient temperature. Me a s u r eme n t C u r r e n t ( RM S ) Co n t r o l Vo l t a g e > A c t u a l T emp e r a t u r e T e mp e r a t u r e f . C o mp 61 , 2 V 12345678 L1 L2 L3 This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

Page 63 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.5.7 Temperature for Compensation This submenu shows the averaged environmental temperature (see chapter 4.2) Me a s u Con t Ac t u > T emp Add i

r r a e t

L1

eme n t o l Vo l t age l T emp e r a t u r e r a t u r e f . C omp i o n . Op . T i me s - > +0 , 0 C 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxA0, RPH2-xxA1, RPH2-xxA3.

5.5.8 Additional Operating Times The following submenus show the calculated additional times according to the service conditions and the configuration of the RPH2. 5.5.8.1 Voltage CH1 This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 1 for the actual control voltage per phase.

>

Ad V V T T -

d i t o l t o l t emp emp 0 , 1

i a a e e

o g g r r

L1

n e e a a -

. Op . T i me s - > CH 1 CH 2 t u r e CH 1 t u r e CH 2 0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3. 5.5.8.2 Voltage CH2 This submenu shows the compensation value for channel 2 for the actual control voltage per phase. Ad V > V T T -

d i t o l t o l t emp emp 0 , 1

i a a e e

o g g r r

L1

n e e a a -

. Op . T i me s - > CH 1 CH 2 t u r e CH 1 t u r e CH 2 0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

Page 64 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.5.8.3 Temperature CH1 This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperature measured for channel 1 per phase. Ad V V > T T -

d i t o l t o l t emp emp 0 , 1

i a a e e

o g g r r

L1

n e e a a -

. Op . T i me s - > CH 1 CH 2 t u r e CH 1 t u r e CH 2 0 , 1 - 0 , 1ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3. 5.5.8.4 Temperature CH2 This submenu shows the compensation value for the environmental temperature measured for channel 2 per phase. Ad V T > T P -

d i t o l t emp emp r e s 0 , 1

i a e e s

o g r r u

L1

n e a a r -

. Op . T i me s - > CH 2 t u r e CH 1 t u r e CH 2 e CH 1 0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA0, RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3. 5.5.8.5 Pressure CH1 This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure measured for channel 1 per phase. Ad T T > P P -

d i t emp emp r e s r e s 0 , 1

L1

i e e s s

o r r u u

n a a r r -

. Op . T i me s - > t u r e CH 1 t u r e CH 2 e CH 1 e CH 2 0 , 1 - 0 , 1ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3. 5.5.8.6 Pressure CH2 This submenu shows the compensation value for the actual hydraulic pressure measured for channel 2 per phase.

Page 65 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Ad T T P > P -

d i t emp emp r e s r e s 0 , 1

i e e s s

o r r u u

L1

n a a r r -

. Op . T i me s - > t u r e CH 1 t u r e CH 2 e CH 1 e CH 2 0 , 1 - 0 , 2ms 12345678 L2 L3

This submenu is available only with modules RPH2-xxxA1, RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.9 Pressure (L1/L2/L3) This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure per phase (L1, L2, L3). Me T A > P P

a s u emp dd i r e s r e s 310

r e t s s

eme r a t i on u r e u r e 3

L1

n t u r e . Op ( L ( L 01 123

L2

f . C omp . T i me s - > 1 / L2 / L3 ) 1 ) 307ba r 45678 L3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA3.

5.5.10 Pressure (L1) This submenu shows the actual measured hydraulic pressure. Me T A P > P

a s u emp dd i r e s r e s

L1

r e t s s

eme n t r a t u r e f i o n . Op . T u r e ( L1 / u r e ( L1 ) 3 12345 L2 L

. C omp i me s - > L2 / L3 ) 10ba r 678 3

This submenu is available only with module RPH2-xxxA1.

5.6

Auxiliary functions

5.6.1 Alarm Input This submenu is for testing only. It shows the inputs (auxiliary contacts and position of the neutral earthing switch) of the alarm-board (only available for module RPH2-xxS).

Page 66 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

5.6.2 Alarm Output This submenu is for testing only. You can set the alarm-outputs individually by typing a ‘1’ at the according position of the pattern shown on the display (only available for module RPH2-xxS).

5.6.3 Error Type If an internal fault is detected (selftest interval > 0 h), error flags are displayed in this menu. Error type 1: Error type 2-4: Error type 5-7: Error type 8-10 Error type 11-13: Error type 14-16: Error type 17-19:

5.7

the switching command on input -x8:1 or -x8:6 is still bending CH1 phase L1 is defective CH1 phase L2 is defective CH1 phase L3 is defective CH2 phase L1 is defective CH2 phase L2 is defective CH2 phase L3 is defective

Switching archive This submenu shows the result of the last 8 switching operations. List of messages: • Switching OK • NOT Switched • Command Time min

(no operation of the breaker) (command impulse to short ( Alarm1 Neutral intermediate -> Alarm2 All other alarm functions are inactive. 6.1.1.2 Necessary Settings Before the RPH2 is ready to operate, all relevant settings must be completed. These data must be set before the first operation (depending on the model): • • • • • • • • • •

System frequency (5.1.2) Control voltage (5.1.3) Rated pressure (5.1.4) Switching program (5.1.5) Function channel 1 (5.1.6) Operating times of each pole (5.2.1, 5.2.2) Arcing Times (5.2.3, 5.2.4) All data for compensation and adaptive control (5.2.7....5.2.16) Actual control voltage (5.3.4) Ratings of external transducers (5.3.5, 5.3.6)

Page 68 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

All other parameters are not essential for operation. To evaluate the necessary data, use the configuration checklist shown on the last pages of this service manual.

6.1.2 Inspection Check whether the external wiring corresponds to the relevant RPH2 wiring diagram. Particularly whether the reference voltage and the neutral earthing switch position signals are wired. If a switching of the neutral is not intended, then it is necessary to short circuit the relevant input terminals of the RPH2 (-X6:8 with -X8:11 for neutral isolated or -X6:8 with -X8:12 for neutral grounded). Make sure that the case is properly earthed. If external sensors are necessary, they are to be installed according to the manufacturer's information. Check whether the plug-in unit is sitting firmly and the fixing screws are tightened. Measure the actual RPH2 control voltage with a multimeter. This value (depending on the model) is required for parameterization (5.3.4). Check the 48 V field voltage between the terminals -X6:8 and-X6:11 (ground). Measure the voltage at the inputs of the external transducers (approx. 24 VDC). Compare the displayed values on the RPH2 for control voltage, hydraulic pressure and ambient temperature (only models RPH2-xxA) with the externally measured ones. Verify the connections of the voltage and current transformer circuits (current only for model RPH2-xI) to the correct terminals (100/√3V or 220/√3V, 1A or 5A) of the RPH2. The two functions of the menu [Aux. Functions] maybe helpful by testing the external connections: The proper connection of the CB’s auxiliary contacts to the RPH2 (only model RPH2-Sxx) can easily be checked by the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Input]. When the circuit breaker is in the closed position you must see three ‘1’ at the first positions in the status line.

>

Au x . Fun c t A l a rm I n A l a r m Ou Se l f t e s t RPH2 V 3 .

L1

i on s pu t t pu t E RROR 04 16 - 03 - 99 11100001 12345678 L2 L3

When the breaker is in the open position, three ‘0’ will be displayed. If the remote reset input is activated, at the fourth position a ‘1’ must be displayed.

Page 69 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

By using the function [Aux. Functions][Alarm Output] you can activate individually each alarm relay by typing a ‘1’ at the according position of the pattern. So the external wiring of the alarm circuits can be checked on correct function.

6.1.3 First operation When all inspections are done, operate the dead circuit breaker via the RPH2. On Point-on-Wave-Controllers with option S check, if the measured operating times are correct, otherwise adjust the values for [Aux.Timeshift] according to 4.1.2.1. Prove that the command impulse to the RPH2 is of sufficient length. For the first load switchings, we recommend using an oscillograph to measure the currents of the three phases together with the reference voltage, in order to verify that the unit is working correctly. It is helpful if the three relayed drive commands can also be recorded on additional oscillograph traces. By using a RPH2 with the option I the currents during switching can be displayed and analysed (see 5.5.1). If the results are not satisfactory you must adapt the pole operating times and/ or the arcing times to achieve the optimal function.

Page 70 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Configuration Checklist RPH2 System Data Ο 16 2/3 Hz

System Frequency

Ο 50 Hz

Control Voltage (48V...250V)

........................V

Rated Pressure

.........................bar

Switching program: Ο Transformer

Ο Shunt Reactor

Ο 60 Hz

Ο Capacitor Bank

Ο User Program Point on Wave

Function Channel 1 Language Selftest Interval

L2

L3

T_C1 Neutral isolated

ms

T_C1 Neutral grounded

ms

T_C2 Neutral isolated

ms

T_C2 Neutral grounded

ms

Ο CB Close

Ο German

L1

Ο CB Open

Ο English

(RPH2-1xx only)

Ο French Ο Free language ...................................

.............Hours

CB Data: CB Data

L1

L2

L3

Operating Time CH1

ms

Operating Time CH2

ms

Arcing Time CH1

ms

Arcing Time CH2

ms

Aux.Timeshift CH1

ms

Aux.Timeshift CH2

ms

Adaptive Control Weighting Factor .................... Compensation

Ο Yes

Ο No

kU1 Voltage CH1

....................

kP1 Pressure CH1

....................

kU2 Voltage CH2

....................

kP2 Pressure CH2

....................

Page 71 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Configuration Checklist RPH2 Temperature Compensation: Switching Channel 1

Temperature +50 °C +40 °C +30 °C +20 °C +10 °C 0 °C -10 °C -20 °C -30 °C -40 °C -50 °C

Switching Channel 2

Delta_t ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms

Temperature +50 °C +40 °C +30 °C +20 °C +10 °C 0 °C -10 °C -20 °C -30 °C -40 °C -50 °C

Delta_t ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms

Analogue Data: Thresholds: Current max. (peak)

....................

A

Control Voltage max

.....................

V

Control Voltage min

.....................

V

Temperature max

....................

°C

Temperature min

.....................

°C

Pressure min

.....................

bar

Pressure max

....................

bar

Actual Control Voltage ....................

V (to be measured and set at site)

CT rated current prim. ....................

A

CT rated current sec.

Ο 1A

Ο 5A

Temperature: Value at 4 mA

.....................

°C

Value at 20 mA

.....................

°C

Value at 4 mA

......................

bar

Value at 20 mA

......................

bar

Pressure:

Page 72 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

Configuration Checklist RPH2 Alarms:

Alarmtext

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Alarm Functions Reset Obligatory Lock-out Alarm List Lock-out Frequency min Frequency max Current max Ref.Voltage Failure RTC Impulse Failure Neutral Intermediate Neutral Grounded Neutral Isolated Selftest ERROR Selftest CH1 ERROR Selftest CH2 ERROR Command Time CH1 min Command Time CH2 min Operating Time min Operating Time max Drive Mech.Failure Archive Full Archive Failure Control Voltage min Control Voltage max Temperature min Temperature max Temp. Transducer Fault Pressure min Pressure max Press. Transducer Fault

Page 73 Issue 3 58.020.034 E 2004-02

This page is intentionally blank.

CHECK--LIST COMMISSIONNING & MAINTENANCE Point on Wave type RPH2

58.020.035EN GRID

The aim of this document is to describe the different defaults which can occur during the commissioning and/or the maintenance of the RPH2.

1. Wiring / assembling /schemes

1.1. Standard wiring of the RPH2 with full options and types of cables to be used for wiring 1.1.1. Circuit-breaker orders :

Orders : shielded cable with earthed screen. In order to avoid coupling between signals, it is highly recommended to separate the input signal of the RPH2 (X8-1 & X8-6) and the outputs (X8-2 to X8-4 and X8-7 to X8-9) in 2

different cables (mandatory when the distance between the control room and the CB is above 500m and the auxiliary supply is up to 200Vdc)

58.020.035EN01 Page : 1 / 11

1.1.2. Control inputs and alarm outputs :

Cables : for auxiliary contacts (CB position) it is mandatory to use twisted pairs shielded cables with earthed screen.

58.020.035EN01 Page : 2 / 11

1.1.3. Reference voltage and current inputs :

Shielded cable with earthed screen.

58.020.035EN01 Page : 3 / 11

1.1.4. Temperature sensor :

twisted pairs shielded cables with earthed screen.

1.2.

Earthing

The earthing terminal of the RPH2 (located on the right flange at the rear of the RPH2) must be correctly wired to the earthing of the cabinet, which is also linked to the ground of the

control room.

A default on this earthing can damage the RPH2 in case of potentials coming from the cables.

1.3.

Auxiliary supply

Symptoms : -

No illuminated LED on the front of the RPH2 and no functional screen.

-

The RPH2 is not switched on. Check the auxiliary voltage between

Diagnostic :

terminals X6-10 and X6-11

Solutions : -

Check the auxiliary cables otherwise change the RPH2

58.020.035EN01 Page : 4 / 11

1.4.

RPH2 not ready

Symptom : Diagnostic : -

The green LED « Ready » on the front panel is not illuminated.

Check the reference voltage input, his frequency, the key-switch position

or the detection of an internal fault during the self-test.

-

Mind the corresponding alarms can be disabled and this can be trappy !

-

Correct the default parameter

Solution :

1.5.

Order outputs

Symptom : -

The RPH2 works correctly (without any alarm) but the delays between orders are not as expected and the measured values are null.

Diagnostic : -

Whether the RPH2 is used on opening or tripping, the channel A is with priority ; Therefore a RPH2-1xxx must be wired between X8-1 for the order input (opening or closing) and X8-3, X8-4 and X8-5 for the

outputs. If the RPH2-2xxx is used on closing, wired the channel A, respectively channel B for opening.

Solution : -

Change the wiring from channel B to channel A mainly for a RPH2-2xxx used on closing

1.6.

Reference voltage

Symptoms : -

Opening and/or closing operation detected but delays on outputs orders not as expected.

Diagnostic : -

The reference voltage is connected on a phase not corresponding to phase 1 of the RPH2.

Solution : -

Change the wiring of the RPH2 : Make a rotation of the outputs wiring of the RPH2. The phase corresponding to the reference voltage must be on

terminal X8-3, the next phase on X8-4 and the last one on X8-5 for channel A, respectively X8-8, X8-9 and X8-10 for channel B. -

Do the same permutation for connections of the auxiliary contacts and the current measures (if option I available)

58.020.035EN01 Page : 5 / 11

1.7.

Too long order

Symptoms : -

Alarm « Command order »

-

Even burn of the input order card if the order is continuous.

-

The opening or closing order sent to the RPH2 is too long, even

Diagnostic :

permanent. Solution : -

Change the electrical scheme, either by decreasing the impulse time (not more than 500ms), or put an auxiliary relay to cut the order.

1.8.

Inactive screen

Symptoms : -

Black screen or virtually transparent .

-

Bad contrast

-

Modify the contrast setting :

Diagnostic :

Solution :

1. Turn the key-switch to "OFF“ (Stop).

2. Push the [Enter] key and keep it pushed. 3. Turn the key on "OPERATION“.

4. The contrast is modified from the darkest to the clearest image. 5. When the contrast is optimal, hold off the touch [Enter].

58.020.035EN01 Page : 6 / 11

2. Parameters /configuration problems These problems may occur mainly on site during the commissioning of the RPH2.

2.1. Symptom :

Diagnostic :

green LED « Ready »

Green Led not illuminated

Possible reasons : -

The device detected an internal error during its self-test procedure (often associated with L1 Led error : self-test error)

-

The reference voltage is not within the correct values (often associated with L2 LED error : ref voltage error)

-

The measured frequency is out of expected range (programmed value +/10%)

-

The key switch is on the OFF position.

-

Self-test : try to switch off then on the RPH2 ; if the error remains the

Solution :

same, then change the RPH2. -

Reference voltage (amplitude or frequency) : analyze of the electrical scheme within the control room. Check the wiring.

-

Switch : turn it to « Operation » position

2.2. Alarms « com. order min/max » and discrepancy between calculated and measured values. Symptom :

Diagnostic :

Solution :

Alarm com order min/max illuminated (often L4 : Com order min)

The RPH2 is not able to calculate correct values even if the auto-adaptive

correction is set on.

Use the « Eliminating Irregular Operating Time Alarms and influence on

adaptive Control” procedure (see annex 1), in reference to the wiring and the used channel. Check the software version of the RPH2.

2.3.

Alarms

2.3.1. Alarms list generated by the RPH2 58.020.035EN01 Page : 7 / 11

-Lock-out : The RPH2 is locked-out, that’s to say it doesn’t work properly.

-Selftest error : if, during the self test procedure, the RPH2 gives an error, (e.g. memory failed, …), then this alarm is active.

-Selftest CH1 error : Detected error on channel A (intrenal to RPH2). -Selftest CH2 error : id. For channel B.

-Reference voltage failure : if there is a modification on the network voltage, this alarm blinks.

-RTC impulse failure : loss of the clock synchronization signal.

-Frequency min : the frequency check is highly important because if the frequency drops under 90% of the programmed value, the RPH2 is not able to give a good

synchronization. Then the alarm is active above this limit.

-Frequency max : If the frequency is above 110% of the rated one, the RPH2 won’t make a good synchronization.

-Control voltage min : The coil voltage has a great influence over the operation times and

therefore the operation speed. Below a rated value, we can’t synchronize. This alarm is then on.

-Control voltage max : id. but for an overrun of the max voltage.

-Command time CH1 min : refers to a too short command order . This could induce the

incapability of the RPH32 for giving orders on all phases with the right delays. This

alarm could also happen when a false order (voltage impulse on the command) is seen by the RPH2. This can be the result of coupling between interconnection cables (from the BCU or the control room to the CB)

-Command time CH2 min : id. for channel B.

-Current max : When too high currents are detected, this alarm is on. The current limit can be settled.

-Neutral intermediate : Signals an unwanted state of neutral connection (neither isolated, nor grounded)

-Neutral grounded : The neutral is grounded (the + polarity is on the terminal X8-12)

-Neutral isolated : The neutral is isolated (the + polarity is on the terminal X8-11) -Operating time min : signals a too short operating time. Therefore the synchronization is not possible as the calculated times and the measured times don’t match.

-Operating time max : signals a too long operating time. Therefore the synchronization is not possible as the calculated times and the measured times don’t match.

-Drive mechanical failure : Default of the mechanical drive ; the corresponding pole position didn’t change (could also be a problem with auxiliary contact wirings)

-Archive full : The RPH2 is able to store up to 1000 archives ; when we reach 900 records, this alarm is lighted.

-Archive failure : memory default.

-Température min : The CB is able to perform within a temperature range. If the external

temperature drops below the limit, the dispersion in the operating times increase and

then a good synchronization is not possible.

-Temperature max : id. For high temperature.

-Temperature transducer fault : this alarm shows a problem on the temperature sensor or its wiring.

58.020.035EN01 Page : 8 / 11

-Pressure min : For hydraulic pressure command, the oil pressure is mandatory to determine the operation times. When the pressure is too low, these times are corrupted.

-Pressure max : id. For higher pressures.

-Pressure tranducer fault : this alarm shows a problem on the hydraulic pressure sensor, or its wiring.

2.3.2. Standard alarms list settled within the RPH2 (for a spring mechanism) The following list is based on the standard settings as programmed in AHT factory. These parameters can be changed, and therefore it is mandatory to check the alarm list before using this. Alarm

Symptom

L1 : self test error

Alarm L1 lighted

L2 : Ref. voltage

Alarm L2 lighted

L3 : Control voltage

Alarm L3 lighted

L4 : Comm. Time min

Alarm L4 lighted

failure

min/max

Diagnostic

Solution

Internal error

Try to switch off then

self-test procedure.

alarm is always on,

detected during the

Loss of reference

voltage or bad

frequency value.

on the RPH2. If the change the RPH2.

Analyze the electrical scheme.

Auxiliary voltage out

Check the battery

Command time on

Analyze the electrical

of limits.

opening or closing order is too short

voltage

scheme.

(35Vdc) is present on the order input signal (X8-1 for channel A and X8-6 for channel B) and blocks the RPH2.

Solution : -

Check the voltages on terminals X8-1 for channel A and X8-6 for channel B) during the self-test.

-

If there is a permanent DC voltage >35Vdc, 2 solutions are possible : first, using a resistor between the related terminal and the earth (X8-1 for

channel A and X8-6 for channel B) in order to decrease this voltage. For example : for a measured value of 52Vdc measured on X8-1, a resistor value equals to 820Ω / 12W should decrease this voltage to 9V and

therefore release the RPH2. Second solution : we can put a signal diode on X8-1 and X8-6 inputs.

3.2.

Destroy of inputs

Symptômes : -

Some inputs (often the auxiliary contacts inputs) are destroyed (burnt

components on the electronic card). -

High frequency perturbations are bbeing measured on these inputs.

-

Some composants or the printed circuit of the acquisition card are burnt.

-

Remplace the corresponding card or the complete RPH2.

Diagnostic :

Solution : -

Put a varistor on these inputs (to be calibrated in accordance to the voltage)between the inputs and the earth.

-

Install a filter on the reference voltage input.

58.020.035EN01 Page : 10 / 11

3.3.

Return polarity

Symptoms : -

Some inputs/outputs of the RPH2 (often the auxiliary contacts inputs) are damaged.

-

A DC voltage above 60Vdc is measured on the auxiliary contacts inputs.

-

Damage of the auxiliary contacts inputs by return polarity.

-

Try to determine the root cause of this interference voltage and, if

Diagnostic :

Solution :

possible, take it out (In case of coupling between cables, it souldn’t be easy to eliminate) -

Wire a resistor between the concerned input and the earth. Mind this resistor will heat and then put a protection against unwell contact.

58.020.035EN01 Page : 11 / 11

This page is intentionally blank.

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components of circuit breaker Presentation In this module

This module contains the following subjects: Subject I -- Introduction II -- General remarks III -- Categories and treatment of the materials: 1 -- Treatment of the SF6 gas 2 -- Materials to be recycled 3 -- Waste products to be destroyed by incineration 4 -- Special wastes

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4--5

L80--000EN02 1/6 GRID

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components of circuit breaker I -- Introduction During the elimination phase for a High Voltage gas insulated circuit breaker, at the end of its service life, the quality of the treatment of wastes generated represents the essential environmental aspect. This manual proposes, for each element of a High Voltage gas insulated circuit breaker, the recommended method of elimination for the various materials it comprises, as well as any possible precautions to be taken.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--000EN02 2/6 GRID

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components of circuit breaker II -- General remarks It is necessary to proceed with a maximum amount of dismantling, so as to ensure the best recycling possible of the materials. Various categories of materials can be distinguished depending on the waste processing channel followed: DS The SF6 gas to be recycled or reprocessed DS The metals to be recycled (without taking into account any surface treatment, paintwork or electro--silverplating) DS Waste products to be destroyed by incineration or sent to the waste dump depending on the channel available. DS Special wastes

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--000EN02 3/6 GRID

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components of circuit breaker III -- Categories and treatment of the materials 1 -- Treatment of SF6 gas

The SF6 gas will be recycled in accordance with the recommendations of the IEC 60480 Standard. However, when recovering the SF6 gas, it is important to respect the following precautions: -- Weigh the recipients used before and after filling, so as to ensure traceability of the weights recovered -- For each recipient, carry out a measurement of the purity of the SF6 gas and a search for the decomposition products (SO2, HF) In case of absence of a local waste processing channel for the recycling of SF6, we recommend a return to our site in Villeurbanne, where we propose reprocessing via our European service providers.

2 -- Materials to be recycled

Metals form the main constituent of a gas insulated substation. The main types of metal making up a substation are: -- Steel: steelwork structure, fasteners, electrical cubicle frames, etc. -- Aluminium: moulded or mechanical welded enclosures, conductor bars, electrodes, etc. -- Bolted fasteners, threaded rods, rating and name plates -- Bare copper: electrical contacts, etc. -- Insulated copper: electrical cable It is important to separate these different metals when dismantling the substation at the end of its service life. In particular for small sub--assemblies made up of various materials. In certain simple cases, it is sufficient to remove the fasteners ensuring the assembly and, in other cases, specific instructions shall be given. The aluminium and copper elements must, under no circumstances, be mixed. Specific waste processing channels associated with these materials do not allow for perfect separation during their processing. In cases where it is impossible to separate them, the component must be sent for incineration.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--000EN02 4/6 GRID

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components of circuit breaker III -- Categories and treatment of the materials (contd.) 3 -- Waste products to This type of waste includes the rest of the materials used in the composibe destroyed by tion of a gas insulated substation, other than for a few very specific cases. incineration These waste products mainly include: -- Parts in epoxy resin: insulating cone in the case of circuit breakers with insertion resistance -- Plastic parts loaded with glass fibre (insulating tubes, etc.) -- Seals and gaskets, rubber bands, roller bearings -- Insulators (support or interrupting chamber) composites etc. Where possible, we recommend that this type of waste be sent via incineration channels with waste heat recovery.

4 -- Special wastes

Certain elements, due to their function or the material constituting them, cannot be sent via a recycling or incineration channel. They include the following components: -- Insulating parts from the interrupting chamber -- Absorbent molecular sieves -- The active elements in electrical cubicles -- Ceramic insulators (support or interrupting chamber) or those still called porcelain, etc. These waste products will follow specific channels and/or undergo certain types of processing. Precise instructions will be supplied for these types of components.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--000EN02 5/6 GRID

End of equipment service life

Dismantling and recovery of components of circuit breaker This page is intentionally blank.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--000EN02 6/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

SF6 gas : Environmental impacts Introduction

The SF6 gas contributes to the greenhouse effect: The greenhouse effect is a natural phenomena, which by capturing a part of the infra--red rays reflected from ground to space, enables the Earth to have an average temperature of 15°C. The most abundant gases, which participate in the creation of this greenhouse effect are Water Vapour, Carbon Dioxide, Methane. However, since the beginning of the industrial era, Man has released gases into the atmosphere, which artificially increase the greenhouse effect. Even if Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) is only present in the environment in low levels, it creates a greenhouse gas, which has the capacity to absorb the infra--red rays emitted by the Earth, which is 22,200 times higher than that of Carbon Dioxide. N.B. : 1 kg of SF6 gas emissions are, thus, the equivalent of 22,200 kg of Carbon Dioxide, which corresponds to the greenhouse effect gas waste released by a gasoline vehicle covering 120,000 km. SF6 gas is used in High--and Medium--Voltage switchgear for its breaking and insulation capacities. The SF6 emissions can be generated in the equipment manufacturing, operating, maintenance and decommissioning processes. The losses are, either, accidental (equipment breakage),or structural (equipment’s leaktightness). Under no circumstances, SF6 gas should be released to the environment: N.B. : In accordance with the International Kyoto Agreements, European Regulations on fluorinated gases and IEC 62271--303 applicable standards (e.g.. IEC 61634), SF6 gas handling operations (filling, recovery) must be carried out by trained and qualified personnel, using tools and procedures enabling gas releases to be limited.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--001EN02 1/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

SF6 gas safety rules New SF6

D Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) is a colourless, odourless and non--toxic gas. D However, it is a gas, which does not maintain life. This gas is heavier than air and the lower parts such as trenches or cable troughs can contain a strong concentration of this gas, which could lead to asphyxia. N.B. : The maximum permissible concentration on a workstation, assuming that people stay there 8 hours a day, 5 days a week, is 1000 ppm (i.e. 0.1%) of the volume. This very low level is a standard value for all non--toxic gases, which are not usually present in the atmosphere.

Every recipient containing new SF6 gas should be labelled as indicated below:

Clean SULPHUR HEXALUORIDE SF 6 S 7/9 – Keep container tightly closed in a well-ventilated place. S 20/21 – When using, do not eat, drink or smoke. S 45 – In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately (if possible show the doctor this label). S61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instructions / Safety Data Sheet. S 63 – If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area and keep them still. S51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--001EN02 2/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

SF6 gas safety rules (contd.) Used SF6

D Under the influence of electrical arcing, SF6 gas can be broken down into sub--products, which are more or less toxic and/or corrosive. D Depending on their nature, these products can be irritant for the mucous membranes, the respiratory tracts and the skin. The SF6 decomposition products are brought to light, even when present in very low levels, by a strong pungent and sulphur odour. Every recipient containing used SF6 gas should be labelled: Used SF6 gas will be stored in a pressurised, leak--tight container, which must be resistant to decomposition products (valves, connectors and piping included) and will be regularly inspected in accordance with the standards in force. The maximum quantity of polluted gas stored on site will be defined in accordance with the rules in force.

LiquidGAS, toxic, corrosive, n.s.a. C - CORROSIVE

T+ - VERY TOXIC

(Contains used Sulphur Hexafluoride SF6) R 26/27/28 – VERY TOXIC BY INHALATION, IN CONTACT WITH SKIN AND IF SWALLOWED.

S 7/9 – Keep container tightly closed in a well-- ventilated place. S 20/21 – When using, do not eat, drink or smoke. S 38 – In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment. S 45 – In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately (if possible show the doctor this label). S61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instructions / Safety Data Sheet. S 63 – If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area and keep them still. S 51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--001EN02 3/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

SF6 gas safety rules (contd.) Used SF6

For all interventions, it is necessary to respect the following instructions: In every zone where the SF6 is implemented D It is forbidden to smoke, eat, drink or store food. D Ventilation must be sufficient. D It is forbidden to use a fuel engine. D Individual protection must be worn, following the table below.

Individual protection

SF6 Technical grade.

Conforming Non--conforming SF6 SF6 including including toxic prolow levels of ducts. Pure SF6 and toxic products . SF6 (post--arcing). used gas without toxic Studies of the comproducts. partment containing polluted SF6.

Wearing of Gloves Wearing of Eye Protection Wearing of a Simple Face Mask Wearing of a Cartridge Filter Face Mask Wearing of a Combination N.B. : For the elimination, the individual protection is managed in HIW

D Furthermore, the personnel intervening on the equipment, must respect at minimum the following instructions : after draining gas, -- Remove the SF6 decomposition products immediately after the opening of the equipment in order to avoid a chemical re--combination with water. -- Ventilation must be sufficient. -- Use an appropriate vacuum cleaner equipped with a dust filter and wipe with a clean, dry cloth. -- Avoid shaking the cloth -- Block the SF6 decomposition products (i.e. molecular sieve, cloth soiled with a 3% sodium hydroxide solution during 24 h) and destroy as dangerous waste. D Avoid contact with soiled parts or dust (Individual Protection) Soiled individual protection, soiled dusters, soiled molecular sieve, polluted gas, must be destroyed as dangerous industrial waste. Polluted gas will be incinerated or recycled depending on its level of pollution. 01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--001EN02 4/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

Transportation of SF6 gas D Transportation of SF6 gas is considered as a transportion of dangerous materials. It must be carried out in accordance with the regulations in force, especially the ADR Regulations in Europe (European Agreement concerning the International Road Transport of dangerous materials). D For each transport, each container must be labelled, the label must be visible and be combined with a Health & Safety / Transportation label and a Transportation slip for dangerous materials must be drawn up. D In the event of a transportation of SF6 gas containing toxic products (waste), the document for dangerous materials must include the ADR 2.2 T C classification with a Safety Plan. The combined label will be the following :

USED SF6 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE

LiquidGAS, toxic, corrosive, n.s.a. C - CORROSIVE

T+ - VERY TOXIC

(Contains used Sulphur Hexafluoride SF6)

R 26/27/28 – VERY TOXIC BY INHALATION, IN CONTACT WITH SKIN AND IF SWALLOWED. S 7/9 – Keep container tightly closed in a well-- ventilated place. S 20/21 – When using, do not eat, drink or smoke. S 38 – In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment. S 45 – In the event of an accident, contact a doctor immediately (if possible show the doctor this label). S 61 -- Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special Instructions / Safety Data Sheet. S 63 – If inhaled, move the victim out of the contaminated area and keep them still. S 51 -- Use only in well ventilated areas.

D Loading and unloading operations are carried out by trained and qualified personnel in accordance with the instructions in force.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--001EN02 5/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Management of SF6 gas

Applicable documentation International Standards

D IEC 60 376 : Technical Quality specifications of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) for use in electrical devices. D IEC 60 480 : guidelines concerning the testing and treatment of Sulphur Hexaluoride (SF6) sampled on electrical devices and specifications concerning re--use. D IEC 62 271--303 : high--voltage switchgear – use and handling operations of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) in high--voltage switchgear.

Technical guides

D SF6 Practical Handling instructions -- CIGRE Brochure 273 : SF6 Practical Handling guide D SF6 Recycling Guide (Revision 2003) -- CIGRE Brochure 234 -- August 2003 -- PARIS : SF6 recycling guide

European Regulations

European Regulations (EC) No842/2006 of 17th of May 2006 concerning certain greenhouse effect fluorinated gases.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L80--001EN02 6/6 GRID

Equipment end of life

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas and its secondary products Presentation Introduction

These maintenance directives incorporate measures for avoiding the hazards involved in the application of SF6 gas to switchgear. Such directives are protective measures and recommendations for the user of SF6 switchgear.

Fundamental rules

Instructions for performance of work on SF6 gas switchgear are given in the appropriate instruction manuals. Switchgear may only be opened after the preparations for scavenging have been completed.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus Opening--up SF6 gas switchgear Recapitulation of important instructions

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L81--001EN02 1/4 GRID

Equipment end of life

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas and its secondary products Evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus Principle and precautions

The table below gives the principle of evacuation of SF6 gas apparatus and precautions to take : Step 1 2 3 4

01--2011

Action De--energize apparatus, switch--off where applicable and earth. Connect the servicing unit to the gas filling nipple by means of a hose and using an adsorber filter. Remove the SF6 gas using the vacuum pump. Depending on the gas volume ; it can be stored for re--use as per indications of IEC standard. Fill gas compartment if possible with nitrogen or dry compressed air at rated pressure and subsequently, discharge outdoors (if possible through an absorber filter).

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L81--001EN02 2/4 GRID

Equipment end of life

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas and its secondary products Opening--up SF6 gas switchgear Precautions to take

At the time of the opening--up SF6 gas switchgear, take the precautions below : DS Open--up SF6 switchgear only after the gas has been evacuated and the pressure inside the apparatus has been reduced to that of atmospheric pressure. DS Put the ventilation system in operation or ensure that fresh air circulates in some other manner when switchgear which contains decomposition products is opened (e.g. circuit--breaker). DS Wear suitable fresh air breathing apparatus if there is even the slightest possibility that personnel working on the equipment could be put in danger through inhalation of hazardous amounts of gas vapor from powdery decomposition products. DS Wear special overalls when working on opened--up SF6 switchgear which contains powdery decomposition products. After completing work remove overalls. DS Avoid stirring--up dust and powder from SF6 switchgear. Difficult to remove dust can be removed with dry non--fibrous rags. A vacuum cleaner should be used to remove loose dust. The vacuum cleaner filter should be able to retains particles of a least 1 m in size. DS Items (such as rags, vacuum cleaner, throw--away--overalls, gloves, etc.) which come in contact with the decomposition products must be collected and neutralized so that the dust cannot be transferred. Before getting rid of these items neutralize in a 3 percent soda solution for 24 hours. verify the degree of neutralization after 24 hours. When soda is added, no bubbles should be result. If there are bubbles repeat the neutralization. DS Under all circumstances ensure that the decomposition products neither come in contact with skin, eyes, clothes, nor that they are swallowed or inhaled. Pay special attention to cleanliness of body, clothes and work-bench. Dust or powder that comes in contact with skin must be washed away with plenty of water. It is advisable to wash face, neck, arms and hands with soap and plenty of water before work--breaks and after stoppage of work. DS Avoid eating, drinking, smoking or storing eatables in rooms or outdoors near to opened SF6 switchgear which may contain arc--decomposed powder.

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L81--001EN02 3/4 GRID

Equipment end of life

Guidelines for the handling of used SF6 gas and its secondary products Recapitulation of important instructions Reminder

Pure, non--contaminated SF6 gas is non--poisonous. Electrical discharges and fault--switching arcs will give rise to different grades of poisonous decomposition products. In small amounts gaseous decomposition products produce -- within seconds and before any poisonous effects can take place -warning symptoms, such as an unpleasant piercing odor, nasal, mouth and eye irritations, which enable working personnel to withdraw to safety. Solid decomposition products (powdery residues from switching) can cause skin irritations. SF6 is about five times heavier than air, and in the absence of turbulence, results in the gas collecting just above ground level and causing suffocation through a deficiency of oxygen.

Important instructions

The table below recapitulates the important instructions to follow at the time of handling of used SF6 gas and decomposition products : No. 1

2

3

4

5

6 7

8

01--2011

Instruction As soon as an unpleasant, piercing odor from decomposition products becomes perceptible leave the substation room without delay. enter the room only after thorough ventilation or when wearing suitable oxygen breathing masks (with filtering or fresh air device). After disturbances, enter the substation room only after having thoroughly aired the room or when wearing independent of ambient--air operating oxygen breathing masks, or alternatively, after verifying by measurement that the ambient air contains at least 17% volume of oxygen, especially if, one has to reckon with the concentration of SF6 in hazardous amounts. Enter rooms located below, and connected with the substation--rooms after thorough ventilation only, or when wearing oxygen breathing masks which operate independent of the ambient--air, or alternatively, after having verified by measurement that the ambient air contains at least 17% volume of oxygen. Ensure that the room ventilation operates satisfactorily, whilst maintenance work is being performed on SF6 switchgear (discharging and filling of gas, opening and cleaning of equipment). When working on opened SF6 switchgear protect skin against contact with gas and avoid swallowing or inhaling of gas. Ensure body, clothing and work--bench cleanliness. Wear special work--overalls and after completion of work discard latter. Wash skin which comes in contact with powder deposits with plenty of water. Before work--breaks and after work wash face, neck, arms and hands thoroughly with soap and plenty of water. Do not stir--up powder deposits resulting from arc--switching. Remove sticky powder with dry rags. Use suitable vacuum cleaner with paper-filter to remove loose powder. Discard used items and filter--bags in such a manner that powder deposit does not spread. Before discarding neutralize used items. Avoid eating, drinking and storing eatables in rooms with opened SF6 switchgear which contains powder deposits.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L81--001EN02 4/4 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Presentation Reminder

Frames may be supplied by either ALSTOM Grid or the customer.

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Components necessary for the operation Support--frame components (per pole) Preparing the column Frame--support assembly

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 5 6

L31--138EN/03 1/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Components necessary for the operation Necessary product

Grease MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing).

Necessary tools

List of the tools necessary for the installing : Mark (1)

Handling

06--2011

Diagram

Designation

Number

Lifting strap (3 m)

2

The support--frame assembly operations and lifting the pole should be performed by at least two persons.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 2/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Support--frame components (per pole) Introduction

If the support--frame is supplied by ALSTOM Grid, check the necessary components to the assembling.

Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(2)

Support

2

(3)

Support

2

(5)

Screws H M16-45

1

(7)

Screws H M16-35

16

(9)

Washer NORDLOCK NL16 SS

16

Continued on next page.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 3/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Support--frame components (per pole), continued Necessary components, continued

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling :

Mark

06--2011

Diagram

Designation

Number

(20)

Screws H M16-45

16

(21)

Strengthening piece

2

(24)

Strengthening piece

4

(25)

Strengthening piece

2

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 4/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Preparing the column Dismantling the case of the poles

Remove the side panels of the case. NOTE : The extraction of the columns will be in the order A, B and C.

Preparing the pole

D Sling the “A” column with the aid of two flexible lifting straps (1). D Extract the column from the case and put it down on the case wood cover laying : -- first, the end of the column, -- second, the support of the operating mechanism (4) on a wedge to ensure the correct installing of the frame supports. X minimumminimum = 260 mm

1 1

4

X

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 5/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Frame--support assembly Process

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 1

Action With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7). -- Install the screw (5) only on this support.

10

x1 2x2 7

3

5 H M16--45

9

H M16--35 2

With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7).

2

10

2x2 7

9

H M16--35 Continued on next page.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 6/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Frame--support assembly, continued Process, continued

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 3

Action Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support (2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20).

2

x4

20

3 21 4

25 H M16--45

With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (2) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7). 10

2x2 7

9

2 H M16--35 5

With the aid of two flexible lifting straps, position the frame--support (3) onto the housing (10) and fasten it with the use of the screws (7) and NORDLOCK washers (9). Do not tighten the screws (7). 10 3

2x2 7

9

H M16--35 Continued on next page. 06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 7/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Frame--support assembly, continued Process, continued

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 6

Action Install the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) inside the frame--support (2) with the use of the screws (20). Adjust the distance between the supports and fasten the strengthening pieces (21)--(25) on the frame--support (3). Do not tighten the screws (20). 21 3

2x2

20

25 21 25

2 7

H M16--45

Install the strengthening pieces (24) outside the frame--support with the use of the screws (20).

x2 20

H M16--45

24

24

x2 20 24 24

H M16--45

Continued on next page.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 8/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

Frame--support assembly, continued Process, continued

The table below gives the steps of installing the supports of the frame : Step 8

Action Tighten all the screws to the recommended torques. 18 daN.m

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 9/10 GRID

Installation

Supporting frame assembly

This page is intentionally blank.

06--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--138EN/03 10/10 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positioning the pole

Presentation Necessary tools

List of the necessary ALSTOM Grid tools for the lifting and positionning of the pole : Mark

Diagram

(1)

In this module

Designation

Number

LIFTING STRAP ”SPANSET” (3 m -- 1000 kg)

2

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3

Lifting the pole Positioning the pole

Warning

11--2011

“Procedure limited to pole installation only. For removal, contact ALSTOM.” “Any faults or cracks in the column may render the procedure dangerous.”

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--200EN/06 1/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positioning the pole

Lifting the pole Process

Install the two flexible lifting straps (1), placing these at the end of the column. By means of a lifting device hoist the pole up whilst allowing it to rest on the base of the frame. Place the trip ropes (10) on the support legs of the chassis frame (9) to ensure guidance of the pole at the time of lifting. Lift the pole with precaution.

1

10

9

11--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--200EN/06 2/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positioning the pole

Positioning the pole Process

The table below gives the steps of positioning the pole : Step 1

Action Use a lifting device to position the chassis frame onto its ground attachment points but do not secure it, whilst respecting the orientation of the pole indicated on the sketch of the device.

2

If necessary, place shims under the supports of the frame so that the upper plate is level. Install the washers (12) and clamp the whole to the ground using nut. Remove the lifting straps. Check the tightening torques of all frame screws.

3 4 5 18 daN.m

6

Tighten the fixings on the two floor seatings in accordance with the module entitled ’Tightening Torques’ and in accordance with the diameters of the anchoring points.

12

11--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--200EN/06 3/4 GRID

Installation

Lifting and positioning the pole

This page is intentionally blank.

11--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--200EN/06 4/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Presentation Diagram

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic Components, products and accessories Preparing the contact surfaces Installing terminals

01--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 4

L31--504EN/03 1/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Components, products and accessories Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Necessary products and accessories

Designation

Number

(1)

Terminal

2

(3)

Screws H M12--45

8

List of the ALSTOM Grid products and accessories necessary for the installing : ALSTOM Grid reference

01--2011

Diagram

Diagram

Designation

--01861262

ISOPROPANOL (1 l) Can of ISOPROPANOL (1l)

--01835106

204--9 Vaseline 204--9

--01835118

Contactal grease

--01831320

A400 Abrasive paper A400

--02212337

Scotch Brite A--VF

--02212334

Rag

--02211842

N°4 Round brush No.4

--02211831

N°16 Brush No.16

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--504EN/03 2/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Preparing the contact surfaces Preparing the contact grease

The contact grease is a mixture composed of Vaseline and Contactal grease. CONTACT GREASE = 50% Vaseline + 50% Contactal grease

Preparing the contact surfaces

The table below gives the steps of preparing the contact surfaces : Step

Action

Diagram X2

01--2011

1

Remove the temporary screws from the terminal pads X1 and X2.

2

Dry rub with fine emery cloth.

3

Eliminate the dust produced.

4

Coat with GREASE.

5

Wipe with a clean rag, leaving just a thin layer of grease.

6

Rub over the grease with waterproof abrasive paper A400.

X1

CONTACT

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--504EN/03 3/4 GRID

Installation

Installing terminals with preparation of contact surfaces Installing terminals Process

Assemble immediately the terminals (1) on the interrupting chambers (2) after preparation of contact surfaces. Fasten the terminals using screws (3); use CONTACT GREASE to seal the screws.

2 2

2

1

x 4 3

Comment

01--2011

H M12--45 5 daN.m

D The electrical resistance value of the assembly should be : R ≤ 2μΩ D Before installing H.V. connectors, prepare the contact surfaces in the same way.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--504EN/03 4/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Presentation Diagram

Necessary tools

List of the tools necessary : Mark

Diagram

(12)

In this module

Designation

Number

Lifting strap (3 m)

2

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3 4

Components and products Preparing the capacitors Installing the capacitors

02--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--605EN/02 1/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Components and products Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Necessary products

02--2011

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Capacitor

2

(3)

Support

2

(4)

Support (depending on the apparatus)

2

(5)

Screws H M12-30

8

(8)

Screws H M12-45

4

(9)

Screws H M12-25

4

(1)

Spacer

4

or

S MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--605EN/02 2/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Preparing the capacitors Installing the supports

S Install the support (3) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5). S Install the support (4) on the capacitor (1) using the screws (5).

1

x 2

5

x 2 5

3

02--2011

4 4

H M12--30 5 daN.m

H M12--30 5 daN.m

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--605EN/02 3/4 GRID

Installation

Installing the capacitors

Installing the capacitors Process

Install the capacitors (1) on the interrupting chambers (6) and (7) -- on the opposite side as the bosse of the housing (13) -- using the screws (8) and (9). NOTE : Use the two spacers (10) to install the capacitors -- capacitor support (4) side.

To avoid the rotation of the interrupting chambers, insert a wedge (13) under the supports of the capacitors (3)--(4) after installing.

9

3 -- 4

13

H M12--25 5 daN.m

7

13

x 2

6

1 1 9

4

x 2

10

H M12--25 5 daN.m 4 10

x 2

8

H M12--45 5 daN.m

02--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--605EN/02 4/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Presentation Diagram

In this module

This module contains the following topics : Topic

Page 2 3

Preparing the stress--shields Installing the stress--shields

02--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--664EN/02 1/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Preparing the stress--shields Necessary ALSTOM Grid components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) :

Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Stress--shields ring

2

(2)

Bracket

8

(3)

Screws H M10-30

8

Necessary product

MOBILPLEX 47 -- MOBILUX EP3 : screw greasing.

Assembling

Install the brackets (2) on the stress--shields ring (1) using screws (3) do not tighten.

1

2 3

x 4 H M10--30

02--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--664EN/02 2/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

Installing stress-- shields Necessary ALSTOM Grid components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the assembling (per pole) : Mark

Diagram

(5)

Designation

Number

Screws H M12-30

8

Necessary product

LOCTITE 262 (screws locking)

Process

Install the stress--shields (1) at each end of the interrupting chambers (4) using the screws (5). NOTE : Lock the screws (5) with “LOCTITE 262”. 4 1

4

1 5 1

x 4 H M10--30 3,2 daN.m

x 4 5 H M12--30 5 daN.m

02--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--664EN/02 3/4 GRID

Installation

Installing stress-- shields on the interrupting chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

02--2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--664EN/02 4/4 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Presentation Markings

Before coupling the chambers and column, check that the markings on the breaking chambers correspond with those on the column

Time taken for coupling operation

The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in a time of ≤ 40 min. NOTE: The coupling operations must be carried out by a minimum of two people.

T(max) ≤ 40 min

Lifting means

Provide an adequate means of hoisting: 3,000 daN (minimum). An aerial basket is mandatory.

Stages of the coupling operation

H

The chamber- column coupling operation can be broken down into a number of stages: Step A

C

Subject Preparing the column’s corona shield Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation Hoisting and preparing the breaking chamber

D

Final coupling

B

09- 2011

H+2m

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

Page 2 3 5 6

L31- 7138EN/01 1/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the column’s corona shield Elements required: ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid elements required for assembly (per pole):

Mark

Assembly

Illustration

Description

Quantity

(50)

Corona shields

1

(51)

Lugs

4

(52)

Fittings H M10-30

4

Attach the lugs (51) to the corona shield (50) using the fittings (52) without overtightening. 51

50

x 4 52

Positioning

H M10- 30

Temporarily fit the corona shield (50) to the base of the first isolator on the column (1).

1 50

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 2/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation Elements required: ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid items necessary for the operation: Mark (20)

(21)

Illustration

Description

Quantity

Seal

1

Screws H M16- 65 (19 mm) H M16- 75 (30 mm)

8

(22)

Washer M16

16

(23)

Nut

8

(24)

Coupling pin

1

(25)

Circlips

1

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 3/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Preparing the elements required for the coupling operation, continued Tools required ALSTOM Grid

List of ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the operation: Mark

Products required

09- 2011

Illustration

Description

Quantity

(30) (31)

”Short” centring pin ”Long” centring pin

1

(32)

Lever

1

(33)

Protective mask

1

(34)

Trolley stop

1

(35)

Fitting tool for coupling pin

1

(37)

Circlip clamp (not supplied)

1

S MOLYKOTE M111 Grease: greasing contact surfaces S LOCTITE 225: locking fitting in place S MOBILPLEX 47 - MOBILUX EP3: greasing fittings

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 4/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Hoisting and preparing the breaking chamber Raising the breaking chambers

Using two slings, lift the chambers and LEVEL THEM, the casing (2) should be at head height (approximate weight: 700 kg).

2

Assembling the centring pins

Fit parts A, B & C to the centring pins (30) & (31) without locking them in place so that they may be easily removed later on. NOTE: Pin (31) is longer than pin (30).

A Depressurizing the chambers

B

30

C

31

S Remove the cap (5) from the transport cover (4) and operate the valve (6) to re- establish atmospheric pressure within the chambers. REMINDER: transport pressure nitrogen: azote (N2) at 0.03 MPa at 205C (101.3 kPa). S Refit the cap (5).

4 5

6

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 5/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling Orientation of the chambers

To aid later identification of the chambers it is of the utmost important that they be coupled the right way round. There are two ’humps’ (B1 & B2) on the casing (2). Set the chambers level with the column (1) so that the humps (B1 & B2) on the casing (2) are on the same side as the control mounting (3).

B1 2 1

B2 2

3

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 6/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Removing the chamber transport cover

The table below shows the steps for removing the chamber transport cover:

Step 1

Action Remove the fixings (40) and insert the lever (32) through the bracket rings (7). Pull on the lever (32) to open the cover (4). Hold on two two of the cover bolts (40) for later use.

Illustration

x 8

4

40 H M16- 55 7

32 2

Start timing. (The final chamber/column coupling operations should be completed in a time of ≤ 40 min).

3

Pull off the cover (4) to free the stop ring (8) and ’Rilsan’ collar (9). 8

9

4 4

Using wire cutters, cut through the ’Rilsan’ collar (9) holding the connector tube and remove it.

9 5

Using the coupling tool (35), remove the tube (10) and separate the cover (4) from the stop ring (8). 10 4

8

35

Continued on next page. 09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 7/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Removing the chamber transport cover

The table below shows the steps for removing the chamber transport cover:

Step 6

Action Fit the trolley stop (34) and fix in place using the bolts (40) recovered from the transport cover, hand tightening them.

Illustration

x 2 40 H M16- 55

34 7

Prepare the fitting tool (35) by screwing the coupling pin (24) onto its end, hand tightening.

35

24

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 8/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the centring pins

Fit the centring pins (30) & (31) hard against the spherical casing (2), lightly tighten the nuts (41). Fit the screws (42) to the centring pins (30) and (31). 2 41

41

42 30 42 31

Removing the column The table below shows the steps for removing the column cover: cover Step 1

Action Remove the fittings (43) and open the cover (11).

Illustration 11

x 8 43 H M16- 55 2

Turn the cover (11) through 90° to remove it.

11

Continued on next page. 09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 9/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the seal

The table below shows the steps for fitting the seal: Step 1

Action Clean the contact surfaces ”A” and ”B” with ISOPROPANOL. Only coat surface ”B” with MOLYKOTE M111 lubricant.

Illustration A

B

2

Fit a new seal (20) and place it on surface ”A”, referring to ”Preparing and fitting static seals”.

20

A

See module ’General assembly procedures’.

3

Fit the protective cover (33).

33

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 10/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the coupling pin

The table below shows the steps for fitting the chamber- column coupling pin: Step 1

Action Slowly lower the breaking chambers (2), inserting the centring pins (30) & (31) into the holes in the column flange (1). Make sure both pins are correctly aligned.

Illustration

2

8

12

30

2

31

Slower lower the breaking chambers (2) to align the pin with the holes in the cylinder (8) and the rod (12). 1

3

Insert the fitting tool (35) with the coupling pin (24) on its end.

24

35

4

Slightly loosen the two screws holding the trolley stop (34) in place and remove it. 34

Continued on next page. 09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 11/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Fitting the coupling pin

The table below shows the steps for connecting the chambers to the column: Step 5

Action Fit the coupling pin (24) by manually pulling on the fitting tool (34) until it stops on the 35 cylinder (8).

Illustration 8

24

6

Fit the circlips (25), sliding them along the fitting tool (35) 35 using circlips pliers (37). See the second method (7). 25 37

7

Remove the fitting tool (35) from the coupling pin, loosening it by hand. Second method: Fit circlips (25) using circlip pliers (37). 25

37

35

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 12/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Connection chambers/column

The table below shows the steps for connecting the chambers to the column: Step 1

Action Clean the contact surfaces ”A” and ”B” with ISOPROPANOL. Only coat surface ”B” with MOLYKOTE M111 lubricant.

Illustration

B

Remove the trolley stop fixing screws (40).

A

40

2

Remove the screws (42) from the centring pins. 42

42

3

Continue to slowly lower the breaking chamber, removing the first two sections of centring pin (30 & 31) when they are no longer of any use as a guide, in the following order: - First section (C) - Screw (42) - Second section (B) NOTE: The aim of this operation is to prevent the centring pins coming into contact with the porcelain fins on the column.

30 31 (B)

(42) (C)

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 13/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Connection chambers/column

The table below shows the steps for connecting the chambers to the column: Step 4

Action Slowly lower the breaking 2 chamber casing (2) onto the column. Position the lugs (51) for the 52 corona shield (50) on the rim of the column then attach using bolts (21), washers (22) and special nuts (23) - See ’Locking Fixings’. See module ’General assembly procedures’. x Lock the nuts (23) at the appropriate torque, immobilising the bolt heads (21).

5

Tighten all fixings (52) to their appropriate torque level.

6

End of coupling operation stop the timer and note the time taken.

7

Remove the last section (A) and the nut (41) from the centring pins. Fix the last bolts (21), washers (22) and special nuts (23) referring to ”Locking fixings”. See module ’General assembly procedures’.

Illustration 50

23

4

x6

22

H M10- 30 3,2 daN.m

51 21 H M16- 65 (75) 13,5 daN.m

41

(A)

Lock the nuts (23) at the appropriate torque, immobilising the bolt heads (21).

23 22 22

x2

21 H M16- 65 (75) 13,5 daN.m

Continued on next page.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 14/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

Final coupling, continued Vacuum extraction and filling with gas

09- 2011

Once the coupling operation has been completed, continue with: S The air extraction operation S The gas filling operation

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 15/16 GRID

Installation

Coupling of column and chambers

This page is intentionally blank.

09- 2011

© ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31- 7138EN/01 16/16 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Presentation Necessary product

Grease MOBILPLEX 47 or MOBILUX EP3 (screws greasing)

Necessary ALSTOM Grid tools

List of the ALSTOM Grid tools necessary for the installing :

Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(1)

Lifting strap

1

(6)

Lever

1

Lifting equipment

Provide an appropriate lifting equipment (300 daN).

Process

The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device on the pole--support : Step A B C D E

F G

Topic Preparing the operating device Preparing the pole operating shaft Coupling the operating device Fastening the operating device

Page 2 3 6 8 10

Removing the blocking tool Low voltage electrical wiring Permanent heating system

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

11 12

L31--7902EN/01 1/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the operating device Unpacking

Remove packaging protection and check that operating device and pole reference numbers are the right ones.

Optical signalizations Check the position of operating device optical signalization :

Circuit--breaker Open

Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the operation : Mark

Installing the necessary components

Closing spring Released

Diagram

Designation

Number

(11)

Seal

1

(22)

Spacer

4

-- Install the spacers (22) on the screws (9) outside the operating device. -- Install the seal (11) on the operating shaft (13). -- Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the operating shaft (13). 13 11

x4

22

9

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 2/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft Introduction

For transport the pole is fitted with a securing tool (4) and a safety plate (5), temporarily attached to the end of the handle (12) To fit the operating lever, you must: a -- Remove the securing tool (4). b -- Manually open the pole. c --Refit the securing tool (4) (“open” position). d -- Remove the safety plate (5).

5

5 7

4

12

Grease

Check the presence of grease (ASEOL 0--365.2) on the pole operating shaft. Continued on next page.

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 3/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued “Manual opening” operation

The table below gives the steps of “manual opening” operation : Step 1

Action Remove the securing tool (4) then screw the operating lever (6) onto the flange on the front of the handle sleeve (12).

Diagram

4 12

6 2

With the help of the lever (6), effect a 60° rotation of the sleeve (12).

6

12

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 4/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Preparing the pole operating shaft, continued “Manual opening” operation, continued

The table below gives the steps of “manual opening” operation : Step 3

Action Put back the blocking tool (4) on the flange of the sleeve (12). NOTE : This tool ensure the angular positioning of pole operating shaft during the coupling with the operating mechanism.

Diagram M10

4

6 4

Remove the lever (6).

4

12 5

Remove the safety plate (5) and the screws from the flange on the front of the handle sleeve (12).

12

8

5

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 5/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Coupling the operating device Necessary components

List of the ALSTOM Grid components necessary for the operation : Mark

Diagram

Designation

Number

(10)

Washer M20

4

(22)

Spacer

1

(26)

Spacer

1

(23)

Eccentric spacer

2

(14)

Nut H M20

4

(24)

Wedge (thickness 1 mm)

1

(25)

Wedge (thickness 0,5 mm)

2

Continued on next page.

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 6/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Coupling the operating device, continued Coupling

The table below gives the steps of the operating device coupling : Step 1

2 3

Action Sling the operating device using a lifting strap (1) like diagram. NOTE : Do not remove the roof (17) of the operating device before slinging. Lift the operating device and make this level. Approximate weight 300 kg. Approach the operating device in assembly position, the jib of the lifting equipment must be under the stress--shields ring (to avoid that the cables touch the stress--shields ring). The final approach must be done with extreme caution.

4 5

Introduce the operating mechanism shaft (13) into the cylinder (12) of the pole operating shaft. As soon as the lower fastening screw (9) “A” emerge from the hole of the operating mechanism support (8), install the spacer (26), washer (10) and the nut (14). NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14). 26 14

9 10 8 12 1 17 8

”A” 13

06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 7/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Fastening the operating device Installing the fastening nuts

The table below gives the steps of installing the operating device fastening nuts : Step 1

2

3 4

Action Install the spacer (22), washer (10) and the nut (14) on the lower fastening screw “B”. NOTE : Do not tighten the nut (14). Install the eccentric spacers (23), washers (10) and the nuts (14) on the upper fastening screws “C” and “D”. NOTE : Do not tighten the nuts (14). Rotate the eccentric spacers (23) to do the contact with the lower edge of the pole--support oblong holes. Tighten -- temporarily at the indicated tightening torque -- the fastening screws (9).

23 5 daN.m

10 14

23

x 2 ”C”

9 ”D”

”B” 14 10

x1

22

Continued on next page. 06--2011 ALSTOM 2010. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.

L31--7902EN/01 8/12 GRID

Installation

Installation of operating device

Fastening the operating device, continued Wedging and tightening

The table below gives the wedging procedure for the fastening screws depending to the X play :

X 22

Important

20 If the X play is ... X